JP6974847B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not the game ball wins a prize at the starting port and the special game is executed, the special symbol display shows the determination result after the special symbol is variablely displayed. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and the determination result is shown as the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-183903

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the production.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the production.

The present invention has adopted the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, a second light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and game information acquired by the acquisition means by winning a prize in the winning means. A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, a special game execution means for executing the special game when it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, and a variable display of the symbol. The game medium is provided with a symbol control means for notifying the determination result of the determination means and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means has won the prize in the winning means. In response to this, by causing the first light emitting means to emit light with a predetermined light emitting color, the winning means is notified that the game medium has won a prize, and a reserved image showing that the variable display of the symbol is suspended. A hold display effect that displays the image on the predetermined effect means, and a variable display effect that displays a variable display image indicating that the symbol is being variablely displayed on the predetermined effect means during the variable display of the symbol. , The special game is executed by using the predetermined effect means during the specific effect of displaying the variable display image in a specific mode notifying that the special game is executed and the variable display of the symbol. An expectation effect that makes the expectation of the above, an effect that is performed during the execution of the expectation effect, a notification effect that notifies that the special game is executed by using the predetermined effect means, and the specific effect. With the start of the first light emitting effect that causes the first light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emitting color different from a predetermined light emitting color, and with the start of the notification effect, the second light emitting means emits specific light. It is possible to execute a second light emitting effect that emits light by color, and when the gaming medium wins a prize in the winning means during the execution of the first light emitting effect, the specific light emitting color in the first light emitting means is used. When the expected degree effect is executed while the light emission is continued and the hold display effect and the variable display effect are being executed, the hold image is hidden while the variable display image is displayed. When the notification effect and the second light emission effect are executed while the specific effect and the first light emission effect are being executed, the variable display image displayed in the specific mode is hidden. On the other hand, the light emission in the specific light emitting color in the first light emitting means is continued, and the light emission in the specific light emitting color in the second light emitting means is ended after the notification effect is finished.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 The figure which exemplifies the state which makes the left-board lamp 25A or the right-hand side lamp 25B emit light in rainbow colors. The figure which illustrates how the start port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors. The figure which exemplifies the light emitting element included in the production object 7. The figure which illustrates how the left side lamp 37A, the right side lamp 37B, and the center lamp 37C of a frame lamp 37 emit light in rainbow colors. Schematic plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1. Enlarged view of display 4 in FIG. A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of various determinations made in a game machine 1. A block diagram showing a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the image / acoustic control board 140 The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of a hit notification, and the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of a loss notification. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of production in a normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of a cut-in effect performed during SPSP reach 1. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the relationship between the content of SPSP reach 1 and the mode of cut-in effect. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of a button effect executed at the end of SPSP reach 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of lamp control in a variable effect in which a jackpot is notified via a premier cut-in and a premier button effect. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example when the effect of notifying that the jackpot is confirmed is not executed from the start of the variable effect to the end of the normal reach. Explanatory drawing for explaining concrete example from time of SP reach development to hit notification or development to SPSP reach Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example until the button suggestion effect is executed through the premier cut-in after the development of SPSP reach 1 (until immediately before the start of the button effect in SPSP reach 1). Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example from the start of the premier button production to the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot is notified at the end of SPSP reach 1 Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example until the button suggestion effect is executed through the strong cut-in after the development of SPSP reach 1 (until immediately before the start of the button effect in SPSP reach 1). Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example from the start of the strong button production in SPSP reach 1 to the notification of the winning at the end of SPSP reach 1. Explanatory drawing for explaining a modification of the premier cut-in An explanatory diagram for explaining a modification example in which the premier cut-in image 58 is superimposed and displayed on top of another cut-in image. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in which the hold icon 54 changes from green to a premier mode due to the hold icon change effect. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the icon mode determination table for holding the 1st special symbol determination which occurred when the number of holdings of the 1st special symbol determination is 1 or 2 in a normal game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in which the icon changes in the order of green → red → premier due to the icon change effect. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in which the icon changes in the order of green → red → premier due to the icon change effect. Description for explaining an example of the determination ratio of the change pattern of the icon change effect that finally changes the icon to the premier mode in the variation effect in which SPSP reach 1 can be executed via the normal reach and the SP reach in the normal gaming state. figure A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the game control board 100. Detailed flowchart of switch processing in step S2 of FIG. 31 Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 32. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 31 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern determination process in step S310 of FIG. 35. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the effect control board 130. Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 38. Detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the final stop symbol determination process in step S159 of FIG. 41. Detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern determination process in step S160 of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the image / acoustic control board 140. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed on the lamp control board 150.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Rough configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with accessories related to winning and determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which the game ball can flow down. Has been done.

When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game ball stored in the upper plate 28 is guided to the launching device (not shown), and the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20 is used. It is fired into the game area 10. A game nail, a windmill, or the like (not shown) is provided in the game area 10, and the launched game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10 and comes into contact with the game nail, the windmill, or the like. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the stop button 22.

The upper plate 28 stores the game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for collecting prize balls is provided. When the player operates the eject button 23 arranged close to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls collected in the lower plate 29 are arranged below the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the handle 20 is kept rotated at a small angle of rotation, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the handle 20 is kept rotated at a large angle of rotation, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

The passage path of the left-handed game ball is provided with a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two ordinary winning openings 14, and an electric tulip 17 as a winning and determining accessory. In addition, in the passage path of the game ball hit to the right, the second start opening 12, the large winning opening 13, the two ordinary winning openings 14, the gate 16, and the electric tulip 17 are used as the winning and judging functions. It is provided. Therefore, when the player makes a right-handed hit, basically, the game ball does not win a prize in the first starting port 11.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And you can win a prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 as the first starting area is a starting port that is always open, and the second starting port 12 as the second starting area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when. In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, or when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is performed. Whether or not to execute is determined, and a "special symbol" indicating the determination result is displayed on the display 4 (see FIG. 7) described later. Here, the "special symbol" is a symbol used to notify the player of the determination result with the passage of the determined fluctuation time (described later). In the present embodiment, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the display 4 during the variable time. Then, as the fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol indicating the above determination result is stopped and displayed. When a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port (or the second starting port) during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 has the maximum number of holdings for the above determination (4 in this embodiment). ) Is suspended up to the above judgment.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting port 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the determination is performed on the condition that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 12. The determination to be executed is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these determinations are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

The large winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the large winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the large winning opening 13. The big winning opening 13 is usually closed by this plate. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the big hit game in which the above plate is operated to open the big winning opening 13 is executed. Will be done. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game as compared with the case where the jackpot game is not performed.

Inside the large winning opening 13, for example, a V region 195 (see FIG. 1) is provided so as to be visible to the player. The V region 195 is a region that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination, and is a region that is normally closed by a blade member (not shown) that can rotate with the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 as the axial direction. In the state where the V area 195 is blocked, even if the game ball enters the big winning opening 13 during the big hit game, the game ball is guided to the loss area (not shown) by the blade member, so that the game is played. The sphere cannot pass through the V region 195. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the blade member maintains an open posture in which the V region 195 is opened for a set time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and then returns to a closed posture in which the V region 195 is closed. The game ball can pass through the V area 195 while both the large winning opening 13 and the V area 195 are temporarily changed from the difficult-to-pass state where the game ball is difficult to pass to the easy-to-pass state where the game ball is easy to pass. Become. Whenever the game ball passes through the V region 195, the game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 116 (described later). In the following description, the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening switch 116 is referred to as "V winning".

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed posture in which a pair of blade members close the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1) and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). It is configured so that the posture can be changed.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintains the open posture for a predetermined time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas the second starting port 12 is in a state in which the game ball is easily passed by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination".

The ordinary winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by winning a game ball. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, the determination is not made even if the game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14.

[Explanation of game status]
Here, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the gaming state related to the special symbol determination, there is a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is the first probability (for example, about 1/319), and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is higher than the first probability. There is a high probability state with a high second probability (eg, about 1/115) (see FIG. 9A).

Further, the gaming state related to the normal symbol determination includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state. The time-saving state has a relatively higher probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination than the non-time-saving state (for example, 1 / 1.1). Further, in the time saving state, the time for operating the electric tulip 17 (that is, the opening time of the second starting port 12) when it is determined to be a hit is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds × 3 times), and The fluctuation time of a normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). That is, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, a normal symbol judgment is performed, and a hit is made with a relatively high probability, and the second starting port 12 is opened for 1.8 seconds x 3 times to win the game ball. Easy to do. Further, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened as compared with the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the non-time saving state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively low, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to be a hit is relatively short. (For example, 0.1 second x 1 time), the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the normal symbol determination is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 16, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second starting port 12 is opened only 0.1 seconds × 1 time. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 12.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is initially set to a low probability state and a non-time saving state (so-called normal gaming state), and at the end of a jackpot game (a normal gaming state as a gaming state), a high probability state and a time saving state. It is set to a state (so-called probabilistic gaming state) or a low-probability state and a time-saving state (so-called time-saving gaming state). Specifically, if a V prize is won during the jackpot game, the probability variable gaming state is set at the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the time-saving gaming state is set at the end of the jackpot game. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the V prize is won during the jackpot game, it is confirmed that the probability variable gaming state is set at the end of the jackpot game.

If it shifts to the probabilistic game state and, for example, it is not determined that the jackpot game is executed even once even if the special symbol determination is performed 168 times, a special indicating the determination result (loss) of the 168th special symbol determination is shown. Immediately after the symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state. The game may be controlled in the probabilistic game state until a very large number of special symbol determinations (for example, 10,000 times) are performed. In this case, the game is effectively controlled in the probabilistic game state until the next big hit game is started.

If it shifts to the time-saving game state and, for example, it is not determined that the jackpot game is executed even once even if the special symbol determination is performed 100 times, a special indicating the determination result (loss) of the 100th special symbol determination is shown. Immediately after the symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state.

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the production is performed in any of the three production modes, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the effect is performed in the effect mode called the normal mode. Further, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the effect is performed in the effect mode called the probabilistic mode, and when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the effect is performed in the effect mode called the time-saving mode. In the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game, the end of the jackpot game is notified during the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "ending period"). The following production display is performed. That is, during the ending period during the jackpot game, an effect display for notifying the end of the jackpot game is displayed by notifying the effect mode corresponding to the game state of the transition destination. This effect display is erased immediately before the end of the ending period (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and accordingly, the mode is switched to the effect mode corresponding to the game state of the transition destination. After that, the gaming state is set to the transition destination gaming state with the end of the ending period. As a result, the jackpot game ends.
Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the production mode corresponding to the current gaming state is switched to the normal mode immediately before the transition to the normal gaming state. As an example, the mode is switched to the normal mode immediately before the special symbol related to the last special symbol determination executed in the current gaming state before the transition to the normal gaming state is stopped and displayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before). After that, it is set to the normal game state along with the stop display of the special symbol that has been variablely displayed.

In each effect mode, for example, the type of background image that can be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol and the type of effect sound (for example, music) that can be output are different from each other. Therefore, the player can recognize the current effect mode (that is, the current game state) based on, for example, the type of the background image.

For example, in normal mode, a background image showing a peaceful cityscape is displayed, in probabilistic mode, a background image showing a devastated cityscape is displayed, and in time-saving mode, a quiet night cityscape is displayed. The background image is displayed.

In addition, unlike the normal mode, the probabilistic change mode and the time saving mode display the remaining number of times image that informs the remaining number of times of the special symbol determination that can be executed before shifting to another gaming state.

[Structure example of the effect means of the gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has a liquid crystal display device 5, a production accessory 7, a speaker 24, and a board lamp 25 (25A, 25B) as various effects. It is provided. Further, the frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 8), which is not shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, in order to notify that a big hit is determined in the special symbol determination, for example, a rainbow is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as "liquid crystal screen 5") during the variable display of the special symbol. A color production image is displayed, or a light-emitting effect means (specifically, a production accessory 7, a board lamp 25, and a frame lamp 37) is made to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, in order to notify the transition to the probabilistic game state (that is, the probable change mode) immediately after the end of the big hit game, for example, the following effects may be performed during the big hit game. For example, a rainbow-colored effect image may be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order to notify that the probabilistic gaming state is set according to the V winning during the "round game" which is the opening period of the large winning opening 13. , The above-mentioned effect means capable of emitting light may be made to emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, the following effects may be performed in order to notify that various information (described later) related to the reserved special symbol determination has a hold determined to be a big hit. For example, before the variable display notified as a big hit is started (for example, during the variable display before the variable display notified as a big hit), a rainbow-colored effect image can be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or light can be emitted. The above-mentioned production means is made to emit light in rainbow colors.

That is, in the present embodiment, in order to notify that it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination, to shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game, or to be determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol determination performed thereafter. , "Rainbow color" is used.

In the present embodiment, white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are used as colors for notifying the high or low possibility of a big hit (hereinafter referred to as "reliability"), and the reliability of each color is high in this order. Iridescent color is used only when the reliability is 100% and it is a big hit, and it is not used when it is a loss. The color for notifying the high or low of the reliability may be used as a color for notifying the possibility of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the probabilistic mode) immediately after the end of the jackpot game during the jackpot game. The possibility of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state may be higher in the order of, for example, white, blue, green, red, and rainbow color. Further, the rainbow color may be used during the jackpot game when shifting to the probabilistic gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and may not be used when shifting to the time-saving gaming state.

In the following, it is advantageous for the player (it is determined as a big hit in the special symbol judgment), or it is surely advantageous for the player after that (the transition to the probable change game state after the big hit game, or , It will be described as using "rainbow color" as the color for notifying that it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol judgment performed after that, but another single color (for example, red) is used instead of the rainbow color. Other composite colors (for example, a composite color of red, yellow, and white) may be used.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image. As shown in FIG. 1, the liquid crystal screen 5, which is the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, is provided at a position easily visible by the player. On the liquid crystal screen 5, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. The decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is composed of numbers and the like, starts the variable display with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and stops and displays with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed is notified to the player of the same content as the content that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and notified to the player (that is, the determination result of the special symbol determination). It is a thing.

Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, an effect image such as a CG or animation character and an item is displayed. Details of these effect images will be described later. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effects, and the like in synchronization with or asynchronously with the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and performs an effect by sound.

The board lamp 25 is a general term for a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, full-color LEDs) provided on the game board 2. The board lamp 25 includes a left board lamp 25A, a right board lamp 25B, a starting port lamp 38, a light emitting element built in the effect (see FIG. 4), a large winning opening lamp (not shown), and a V winning lamp (not shown). (Not shown) is included.

In the following description, controlling a light emitting element (for example, a full-color LED) to be in a lighting state or a "blinking" state is collectively referred to as "light emission". The "blinking" in the present embodiment may be a state in which the lighting state and the extinguishing state are controlled, and the length of the blinking time and the extinguishing time is irrelevant. The blinking is controlled to, for example, a state in which the lighting state and the extinguishing state are alternately controlled at a relatively short time interval (for example, 0.1 second interval), and a lighting state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). It includes a state in which the light is controlled to be turned off for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) and then turned on again.

For example, during the variation display of the special symbol, the board lamp 25 emits light with a color for notifying the high or low reliability of the variable display during execution or the pending special symbol determination. That is, the board lamp 25 is configured as an effect means having a function of suggesting reliability during the variable display of the special symbol. However, the board lamp 25 of the present embodiment does not have the above-mentioned function in all the effects during the variable display of the special symbol, but adopts the configuration having the above-mentioned function in some of the effects described later. That is, the board lamp 25 is configured as an effect means that implicitly suggests reliability only to some players who know the gaming machine 1 during the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, the board lamp 25 has a mini character effect even if a "mini character effect" (described later) that displays a character suggesting that the jackpot has been determined is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It emits light in a mode that does not suggest the reliability of the above (for example, a mode that appears to be synchronized with the rhythm of the BGM for the normal mode output from the speaker 24). On the other hand, for example, when the cut-in effect described later is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, the board lamp 25 emits light in order to suggest the high or low reliability of the cut-in effect. As described above, the board lamp 25 does not have the above-mentioned function in all the effects during the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to give the player a slight sense of incongruity and motivate him / her to become interested in knowing the game machine 1 deeply. In this embodiment, the frame lamp 37, which will be described later, also has the same function as the panel lamp 25, and has the above-mentioned function only in some of the effects described later. As a result, the frame lamp 37, like the board lamp 25, is configured as an effect means that implicitly suggests reliability only to some players during the variable display of the special symbol.

Of the board lamps 25, the left board lamp 25A is provided on the left side of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the game board 2, and the right board lamp 25B is provided on the right side of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the game board 2. The left panel lamp 25A has a configuration in which seven sections are arranged in the vertical direction (see FIG. 1). Each of the seven compartments is composed of a resin that transmits and diffuses light, and a light emitting element (full-color LED) is provided inside each compartment. The light emitting element provided inside each section can emit light in any color (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue, purple, etc.). By causing each light emitting element to emit light in a desired color, each of the seven sections constituting the left panel lamp 25A "lights up" in one light emitting color. For example, by simultaneously emitting light emitting elements provided in each of the seven sections of the left panel lamp 25A with the same color (for example, blue), the entire left panel lamp 25A has the same color (for example, blue). It can be made to emit light. Further, for example, the light emitting elements provided in each of the seven sections of the left panel lamp 25A can simultaneously emit light in different colors. Like the left panel lamp 25A, the right panel lamp 25B also has a configuration in which seven compartments are arranged in the vertical direction, and a light emitting element is provided inside each compartment.

A method of causing the left panel lamp 25A or the right panel lamp 25B to emit light in rainbow colors will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the left panel lamp 25A or the right panel lamp 25B emits light in rainbow colors. As shown in FIG. 2, for example, when the left panel lamp 25A emits rainbow colors to notify that it is set to a jackpot or a probabilistic gaming state, each section constituting the left panel lamp 25A is different. By simultaneously emitting light in seven colors (specifically, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue, and purple), the left panel lamp 25A emits light in rainbow colors as a whole. For example, at time point t1, the seven sections arranged in the vertical direction are arranged in order from the top, "red", "orange", "yellow", "green", "light blue", "blue", and "purple" (rainbow color). It emits light in each color that constitutes. In addition, the color of each section is changed in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red → orange → ... every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) to make it emit rainbow colors. be able to. For example, at time point t1 + Δt (after 0.5 seconds have passed from time point t1), seven vertically arranged sections are arranged in order from the top, "orange", "yellow", "green", "light blue", and "blue". , "Purple", "Red" to emit light. At time point t1 + 2Δt (1 second after time point t1), the seven sections arranged in the vertical direction are arranged in the order of "yellow", "green", "light blue", "blue", "purple", and "purple". Lights up in "red" and "orange".

Since each section constituting the right panel lamp 25B has the same function as each section constituting the left panel lamp 25A, the right panel lamp 25B can also be controlled to emit light in the same manner as the left panel lamp 25A. It can be made to emit light in rainbow colors.

The start port lamp 38 is provided, for example, in the lower part of the second start port 12 in the game board. The start port lamp 38 is composed of one (or a plurality) light emitting elements. The start port lamp 38 basically has a light emitting color (for example, white) that does not indicate high or low reliability in order to notify the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 that the game ball has won the prize. It emits light for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) accordingly. However, the start port lamp 38 is rainbow-colored when an icon change effect (described later) for notifying that there is a big hit or a hold determined to be a big hit is executed or when it is notified that it is set to a probabilistic gaming state. It emits light at. Further, when either the icon or the hold icon is displayed in a color indicating the high or low reliability, the start port lamp 38 emits light in a color suggesting the high or low reliability.

Here, a method of causing the start port lamp 38 to emit light in rainbow colors will be described. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the start port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors. As shown in FIG. 3, when the start port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors to notify that it is set to a jackpot or a probabilistic gaming state, for example, red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → The emission color of the entire start port lamp 38 changes every predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the order of purple → red → ..., so that it emits rainbow color over time. Specifically, the start port lamp 38 is made to emit light in "red" at the time point t1, and is made to emit light in "orange" at the time point t1 + Δt (after 0.3 seconds have passed from the time point t1), and is made to emit light at the time point t1 + 2Δt (time point t1 to 0. It emits light in "yellow" at the time point t1 + 3Δt (after 0.9 seconds have passed from the time point t1), and emits light in "green" at the time point t1 + 4Δt (after 1.2 seconds have passed from the time point t1). At time point t1 + 5Δt (1.5 seconds after time point t1), it emits light at “blue”, and at time point t1 + 6Δt (1.8 seconds after time point t1), it emits light at “purple”. As a result, the start port lamp 38 can be made to emit rainbow-colored light over time.

The effect 7 is movably configured with respect to the game board 2. When the effector 7 of the present embodiment is not operating, it is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 1). In the following description, the position of the effector 7 arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal screen 5 is referred to as an “initial position”. When it is time to operate the effecting accessory 71, the effecting accessory 71 moves from the initial position in the lower left direction by the driving force of the effecting accessory motor 71, and is arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5 (FIG. 18 (G). ), See FIG. 19 (I)). In the following description, the position of the effecting object 7 arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5 is referred to as an “advanced position”. Further, the effect 7 is used for various effects by causing a plurality of built-in light emitting elements (one type of panel lamp 25) to emit light in a plurality of colors or a single color. The effect 7 basically emits light in a light emitting color that does not suggest high or low reliability in order to improve the effect of the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. However, the effecting object 7 emits light in rainbow colors to notify that it is a big hit at the time of executing the hit operation effect and the third pseudo-continuous effect (both described later). The effect 7 may be emitted in rainbow colors to notify that, for example, the probabilistic gaming state is set during the jackpot game.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emitting element included in the effecting object 7. By simultaneously emitting light from each light emitting element built in the effect 7 shown in FIG. 4 in seven different colors (specifically, red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue, and purple), the effect is produced. The accessory 7 emits light in rainbow colors as a whole. In addition, the color of each light emitting element is changed in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red → ... every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) to change the color of the rainbow at any time. By controlling so that all the constituent colors appear at the same time, the effect 7 can be made to emit rainbow colors.

The large winning opening lamp (not shown) is composed of, for example, one (or a plurality) light emitting elements provided around the large winning opening 13. The large winning opening lamp is white for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) for each winning according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 13 in order to notify the large winning opening 13 that the game ball has won a prize. It is a lamp that emits light.

The V winning lamp (not shown) is composed of, for example, a plurality of light emitting elements provided around the V region 195. The board surface on the front side (player side) of the V region 195 is made of a transparent member. The light from the V winning lamp provided around the V region 195 passes through the transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light from the V region 195 and the V winning lamp arranged in the large winning opening 13. Since each light emitting element constituting the V winning lamp has the same function as each light emitting element constituting the effecting object 7, the V winning lamp also emits the effecting object 7 in rainbow colors in the same manner. By controlling the light emission, it is possible to emit light in rainbow colors.

The V winning lamp emits a rainbow color for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) according to the V winning in order to notify the V winning and to notify that the gaming state immediately after the jackpot game is set to the probabilistic gaming state. It's a lamp. When the V winning lamp emits light, the player can visually recognize the light emission, and can recognize that the state shifts to the probabilistic game state (probability change mode described later) after the jackpot game ends.

The frame lamp 37 is a general term for a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, full-color LEDs) provided on the frame member 3. The frame lamp 37 is provided, for example, in the frame member 3 so as to surround the left peripheral portion of the game board 2 and the left side lamp 37A, and in the frame member 3 so as to surround the right peripheral portion of the game board 2. It is composed of a right side lamp 37B, a center lamp 37C provided between two speakers 24 in the frame member 3, and a button lamp 262 (see FIG. 8).

Basically, the frame lamp 37 emits light in a light emitting color that does not suggest high or low reliability in order to improve the effect of the effect of displaying the image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, as in the case of the board lamp 25. It is a lamp that emits light in a emission color that suggests high or low reliability when the cut-in effect described later is executed.

The left side lamp 37A, the right side lamp 37B, and the center lamp 37C (hereinafter collectively referred to as "frame lamps 37A to C") of the frame lamp 37 are each composed of a plurality of light emitting elements. Therefore, the frame lamps 37A to C can emit rainbow colors.

FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the left side lamp 37A, the right side lamp 37B, and the center lamp 37C of the frame lamp 37 are made to emit light in rainbow colors. As shown in FIG. 5, the left side lamp 37A includes, for example, seven light emitting elements, and when each light emitting element emits light, the region surrounded by the broken line emits light. For example, at a certain point in time, the seven light emitting elements of the left side lamp 37A are simultaneously emitted with "red", "orange", "yellow", "green", "light blue", "blue", and "purple" in order from the bottom. As a result, the left side lamp 37A emits light in rainbow colors as a whole. Similarly, the right side lamp 37B also includes seven light emitting elements, and each light emitting element emits light in rainbow colors as a whole by causing each light emitting element to emit light so that each color constituting the rainbow color appears at the same time. Further, the center lamp 37C of the frame lamp 37 includes, for example, seven light emitting elements, and each light emitting element emits light in rainbow colors as a whole by causing each light emitting element to emit light so that each color constituting the rainbow color appears at the same time. .. The frame lamps 37A to C are specified in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red → ..., like the left panel lamp 25A and the right panel lamp 25B. Change every time (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, all the colors constituting the rainbow color are controlled to appear at the same time at any time when the light emission control in the rainbow color is performed. As a result, the frame lamps 37A to C can continue to emit light in the rainbow color as a whole at any time when the light emission control in the rainbow color is performed.

FIG. 6 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1. The button lamp 262 of the frame lamp 37 is, for example, a lamp built in the effect button 26 in which a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, full-color LEDs) are arranged in a circle (see FIG. 6). In the present embodiment, the button lamp 262 is in a specific period (specifically, for example, during the "valid period" related to the button effect (described later: see FIG. 16), and during the hit operation effect not during the valid period (specifically, during the hit operation effect). It will be described later: Except for (see FIG. 21B)), the light emission is suppressed and the light is turned off. The "valid period" is, for example, a period during which the operation for the effect button 26 is valid. In the present embodiment, a "button effect" is executed in which the button lamp 262 is made to emit light in any of white, red, or rainbow colors with the start of the valid period to urge the player to operate the effect button 26. .. In the present embodiment, the button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits white or red light can be executed a plurality of times during one variation display of the special symbol. However, the button effect that the button lamp 262 emits in rainbow colors can be executed only once during one variable display of the special symbol that notifies the jackpot. Further, the button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits light in rainbow colors is different from the button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits light in other colors in that the appearance timing is uniquely determined according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The detailed mode of the button effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, but the light emission control of the button lamp 262 (that is, the button effect) ends with the end of the valid period. The validity period is set according to the operation of the effect button 26 during this validity period, or with the arrival of a predetermined end timing of the validity period (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the validity period). finish. As described above, the button lamp 262 is different from the other lamps and the panel lamp 25 constituting the frame lamp 37 in that it has a function of notifying that the lamp is in the valid period. The button lamp 262 may be controlled so as to be capable of emitting rainbow colors during a period other than the effective period (for example, during the above-mentioned hit operation effect).

By causing each light emitting element of the button lamp 262 to emit light so that all the colors constituting the rainbow color appear at the same time, the effect button 26 emits light in the rainbow color as a whole. The button lamp 262, like the left panel lamp 25A and the right panel lamp 25B, changes the color of each light emitting element in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red → ... For example, change every 0.5 seconds). At this time, all the colors constituting the rainbow color are controlled to appear at the same time at any time when the light emission control in the rainbow color is performed. As a result, the effect button 26 can continue to emit light in rainbow colors as a whole at any time when the light emission control in rainbow colors is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light, the entire gaming machine (more specifically, the entire gaming board 2 and the frame member 3) appears to emit light centering on the liquid crystal screen 5.

[Configuration example of input means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 6, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to input. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by the player operating (for example, pressing).

The effect button 26 has a normal state in which the upper surface thereof is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the frame member 3, and a protrusion whose upper surface protrudes upward by a predetermined height (for example, 10 cm) with respect to the upper surface of the frame member 3. It is configured to allow control to change its height to and from the state. The effect button 26 can be operated regardless of the height controlled between the normal state and the protruding state. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation or a cursor movement, and is configured to have an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, the effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. Further, the gaming machine 1 can adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the effect button 26 (or effect key 27).

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. 7, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first It includes a special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game status indicator 47, a round indicator 48, and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 changes and displays the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, thereby determining the first special symbol. Notify the judgment result of. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination to determine the second special symbol. Notify the judgment result of. In the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42, as a special symbol, the jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" or the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing". The lost symbol indicating that "" is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol hold display 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination (hereinafter, referred to as "special 1 hold number"). The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination (hereinafter, referred to as "special 2 hold number").

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the "ordinary symbol" in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. .. The "ordinary symbol" is a symbol used for displaying the variation for the variation time (for example, 25 seconds) determined by the ordinary symbol determination and notifying the player of the determination result as the variation time elapses. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round display 48 displays the number of rounds of the big hit game when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as "second special symbol". May be distinguished.

[Explanation of jackpot types]
Next, the types of jackpots in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. When a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 11 and becomes a big hit, the big hit symbol indicating "6R probability change" or the big hit symbol indicating "6R time reduction" stops at the first special symbol display 41 (FIG. 9). (B)). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12, the jackpot symbol indicating "16R probability change" or the jackpot symbol indicating "16R time reduction" stops at the second special symbol display 42.

When the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R probability change or the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R time reduction is stopped, the number of winnings of the game ball to the jackpot 13 reaches 10 as a jackpot game with 6 rounds. Or, 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening 13 was opened), and the round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened is performed 6 times.

When the jackpot symbol indicating the 16R probability change or the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R time reduction is stopped, the round game is performed 16 times as the jackpot game having 16 rounds.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R probability variation and the jackpot symbol indicating the 16R probability variation are the jackpots that can be V-winned, and the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R time reduction and the jackpot symbol indicating the 16R time reduction are V-winning. It's a difficult jackpot.

During the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot that can win the V prize, the V prize is basically won, and the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the probabilistic game state (high probability state and time saving state).

During the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot that is difficult to win the V prize, the V prize is basically not won, and the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the reduced working hours game state (low probability state and reduced working hours state). In addition, even if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game related to the jackpot that can win the V prize, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the reduced working hours gaming state.

In this way, the jackpot that can win a V is a jackpot that involves a transition to a high-probability state, and can be said to be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player as compared with a jackpot that is difficult to win a V without a transition to a high-probability state.

In the following explanation, the jackpot that can win V is simply called "probability change hit", and the jackpot that is difficult to win V is simply called "time saving hit".

[Outline of the configuration of the control device of the gaming machine 1 and various determinations made by the gaming machine 1]
With reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, a configuration example of the control device included in the gaming machine 1 and an outline of various determinations performed by the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of various determinations performed by the gaming machine 1.

On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls sent out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 8, the control device of the game machine 1 comprehensively directs the production based on the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game such as various determinations and the transmission of commands, and the commands received from the game control board 100. It is composed of an effect control board 130 for controlling the effect, an image / acoustic control board 140 for controlling the effect by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 for controlling the effect by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be composed of one board.

[Structure example of game control board 100]
As illustrated in FIG. 8, the game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and a random number circuit 104. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the determination and the number of payout prize balls based on the program or the like stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like. The random number circuit 104 generates, for example, a jackpot random number used to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a gate switch 114, a large winning opening switch 115, a V winning opening switch 116, an ejection switch 117, and a large winning opening. The control unit 118, the V winning opening control unit 119, the normal winning opening switch 120, and the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the indicator 4 are connected. Since the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has four ordinary winning openings 14, it is provided with four ordinary winning openings switches 120, but in FIG. 8, only one ordinary winning opening switch 120 is provided. It is written.

The first start port switch 111 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be drive-transmitted in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

The large winning opening switch 115 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 115 is guided to the V region 195 or the loss region (not shown) by the blade member (not shown) provided inside the large winning opening 13. The V winning opening switch 116 detects that the game ball has passed through the V area 195, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The discharge switch 117 detects that the game ball has passed through the lost area, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 116, an effect image for notifying the V winning (for example, the character "V" accompanied by the effect image of "rainbow color") is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Is displayed in. Along with this display, the V winning lamp (not shown) was emitted in rainbow colors for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and also emitted in a light emitting mode (for example, blinking in yellow) corresponding to the effect during the jackpot game. The left and right panel lamps 25A and 25B (hereinafter collectively referred to as "panel lamps 25A and 25B") and the start port lamp 38 start emitting light in rainbow colors for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the V prize has been won and that the player will be in the probabilistic mode (that is, the probabilistic game state) immediately after the jackpot game is completed by emitting light in rainbow colors. The effect means (effect accessory 7, frame lamp 37, etc.) excluding the board lamps 25A and 25B and the start port lamp 38 continue to control light emission in a light emission mode corresponding to the effect during the jackpot game. It should be noted that all the effect means controlled so as to be capable of emitting light may be made to emit light in rainbow colors in accordance with the emission control in rainbow colors of the V winning lamp.

In the present embodiment, the V-winning lamp is controlled so as to be capable of emitting rainbow colors when the effect image for notifying the V-winning is displayed, but is not emitted in rainbow colors due to other effects. As a result, the V winning lamp is provided with a function of notifying the V winning. It should be noted that the V-winning lamp may be controlled to emit rainbow colors in accordance with an effect other than the effect related to the V-winning effect (for example, a hit operation effect described later (see FIG. 21B)).

The large winning opening control unit 118 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the large winning opening 13 so as to be drive-transmitted, based on a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The V winning opening control unit 119 opens and closes the V region by operating an electric solenoid connected to a blade member that opens and closes the V region 195 so as to be drive-transmitted, based on a control signal from the game control board 100.

The normal winning opening switch 120 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

When the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a detection signal from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the large prize opening switch 115, or the normal prize opening switch 120, the game ball wins a prize. The payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board. Although detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies the game ball to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29 by controlling the drive motor that sends out the game ball from the ball tank.

The main CPU 101 acquires "various random numbers for special symbol determination" as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and uses the acquired various random numbers to perform the first special symbol determination. Run. Further, various random numbers for special symbol determination are acquired at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and the second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired various random numbers.

In the present embodiment, for example, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a variable pattern random number, and a reach random number are used as "various random numbers for determining a special symbol".
The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether it is a jackpot or a loss.
The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of the jackpot symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the combination of the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the gaming state that shifts immediately after the end of the jackpot game is different for each jackpot symbol (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, it can be said that the symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot.
The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation time, which is the time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display in the mode showing the determination result of the special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the pattern in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as “variable pattern”) is different for each variable time, so that the variable pattern random number can be said to be a random number for determining the variable pattern.
The reach random number is a variation pattern group for loss that exceeds a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) when determining a variation pattern when it is determined to be a loss, and a variation pattern group other than the variation pattern group (that is, a specific number of seconds or less). It is a random number for selecting from which of the fluctuation pattern group for loss) the fluctuation pattern is determined.

Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a normal symbol random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes the normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 12, and is, for example, a random number generated by using a random counter provided in the main RAM 103. When the main CPU 101 acquires a normal symbol random number, whether or not the acquired normal symbol random number matches the determination value assigned to the determination result that the second starting port 12 is opened as the determination value to be compared with the ordinary symbol random number. It is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12 based on the random number.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number is generated by using the random number circuit 104, and various random numbers for determining a special symbol other than the jackpot random number are generated by software using a random counter provided in the main RAM 103.

Various determination values for comparison with various random numbers for special symbol determination are stored in advance in the main ROM 102. For example, the main ROM 102 stores in advance a jackpot determination table (not shown) in which the determination value to be compared with the jackpot random number is assigned in advance to any one of "big hit" and "loss". For example, the main CPU 101 uses the acquired jackpot random number and the jackpot determination table to determine whether the determination result of the jackpot determination (see FIG. 36) is "big hit" or "missing". It is decided before the judgment result of is notified. When the big hit random number matches the determination value assigned to the "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, "0 to 65535" is set as a determination value to be compared with the jackpot random number (see FIG. 9A). In the big hit judgment table for low probability state (big hit judgment table for low probability time), "0 to 204" is assigned to "big hit", and "205 to 65335" is assigned to "miss". (That is, the jackpot probability is about 1/319). Further, in the jackpot determination table for high probability state (big hit determination table for high probability), "0 to 570" is assigned to "big hit", and "571-65535" is assigned to "miss". Assigned (ie, jackpot probability about 1/115).

Further, for example, in the main ROM 102, a "design determination table" (not shown) and a "big hit variation pattern table" (not shown) are stored in advance as tables to be used when a jackpot is determined. Further, as a table to be used when it is determined to be lost, a "reach determination table" (not shown) and a "variation pattern table for loss" (not shown) are stored in advance.

The "design determination table" is a table in which the determination values to be compared with the symbol random numbers are pre-assigned to any one of a plurality of (two types in this embodiment) jackpot symbols. For example, the main CPU 101 determines the type of the jackpot symbol based on whether the acquired symbol random number matches the determination value assigned to which jackpot symbol after the determination of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, "0 to 99" is set as a determination value to be compared with the symbol random number (see FIG. 9B). In the symbol determination table related to the first special symbol (design determination table for the first starting port), "0 to 53" is assigned to "6R probability variation" (determination ratio 54%), and "6R time reduction" is assigned. On the other hand, "54 to 99" is assigned (decision rate 46%). Further, in the symbol determination table related to the second special symbol (design determination table for the second starting port), "0 to 82" is assigned to "16R probability variation" (determination ratio 83%), and "16R time reduction". "83-99" is assigned to "" (decision rate 17%).

The "big hit variation pattern table" and the "loss variation pattern table" are based on which of the determination values to be compared with the variation pattern random number matches the acquired variation pattern random number from a plurality of variation patterns. It is a table for determining one fluctuation pattern.

The "reach determination table" is a table for determining whether or not to select a variation pattern from a group of variation patterns for loss that exceeds a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds). Whether or not to select a variation pattern from a group of variation patterns for loss exceeding a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) based on which of the determination values included in the reach determination table the acquired reach random number matches. Is determined. In the present embodiment, as the number of holdings during the execution of the special symbol determination increases, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern group for loss exceeding a specific number of seconds (hereinafter referred to as “reach ratio”) becomes smaller. It is set in advance (see FIG. 9C).

Specifically, for example, when "0 to 99" is preset as a determination value for comparison with the reach random number, and when the number of reserved special symbol determinations at the time of executing the first special symbol determination is 0 to 1 ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “holding 0 to 1”), and “0 to 14” is assigned to the determination result of determining from the loss variation pattern group exceeding a specific number of seconds. Further, "15 to 99" are assigned to the determination result of determining from a group other than the above fluctuation pattern group (that is, the reach ratio is 15%, see FIG. 9C). Further, when the number of reserved special symbol determinations at the time of executing the first special symbol determination is 2 to 3, the reach ratio is 5%.

As illustrated in FIG. 9D, in the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns A1 to A14 are prepared in advance as jackpot fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol when controlled to the normal gaming state. Further, as fluctuation patterns for loss, fluctuation patterns H1 to H11 exceeding a specific number of seconds and fluctuation patterns H12 to H14 having a specific number of seconds or less are prepared in advance.

In the present embodiment, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is determined by the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130. The variable effect pattern is the basis (scenario) of the composition of the "variable effect". Here, the "variable effect" is an effect based on the result of the special symbol determination, and is a general term for the effect executed from the time when the special symbol starts the variable display to the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The variation effect includes a variation display of the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502, and an effect using various lamps (for example, a panel lamp 25), a speaker 24, and the like. The specific mode of the variable effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 and the like.

In the present embodiment, a variation effect pattern that cannot execute a reach effect (described later) that is expected to be a big hit is determined in response to a variation pattern for loss of a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) or less. NS. In addition, a variation effect pattern capable of executing reach effect is determined corresponding to the variation pattern for loss exceeding a specific number of seconds. Therefore, the determination using the reach random number is substantially a process of determining the presence or absence of the reach effect. In the case of a jackpot in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed regardless of which variation pattern for the jackpot is determined (that is, the ratio of the jackpot notified via the reach effect is 100). %).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot variation pattern table, the longer the variation time of the special symbol, the more determination values to be compared with the variation pattern random number are assigned. Further, in the variation pattern table for loss, the variation pattern having a shorter variation time of the special symbol is assigned more judgment values to be compared with the variation pattern random number. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is easy to determine a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long. Further, in the case of loss, it is easy to determine a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short, and it is difficult to determine a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long.

(Configuration example of main RAM 103)
FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration example of the main RAM 103 in the game control board 100 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 10, the main RAM 103 includes a determination storage area 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, a fourth reserved storage area 1034, and a first. A reserved storage area 1035, a second reserved storage area 1036, a third reserved storage area 1037, and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 stores various information related to the first special symbol determination in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 each time a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11. It is an area. The first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 stores various information related to the second special symbol determination in order from the first reserved storage area 1035 every time a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12. It is an area.

For example, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 when the special symbol is variablely displayed or during the jackpot game, the special symbol determination or the variable display of the special symbol cannot be performed immediately. Can not. Under such a situation, the main CPU 101 stores various information related to the special symbol determination in the hold storage areas 1031 to 1038 as information indicating the hold of the special symbol determination. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not suspended, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 uses the acquired random numbers and the like as a starting port in which the game ball wins. Immediately after storing in the first reserved storage area (1031 or 1035) corresponding to the above, the device is shifted to the determination storage area 1030.

For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 in a state where information is not stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the first special symbol acquired by this winning is obtained. Various information related to the determination is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 which is the highest level of the empty entry. Further, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 with information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, the first special symbol determination acquired by this winning is performed. The various information concerned is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033, which is the highest level of the free entry.

Further, for example, "preliminary determination information" is also stored in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, a preliminary determination is made to determine whether or not the game is a jackpot prior to the special symbol determination based on the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. It is performed (step S2109 in FIG. 33, step S2209 in FIG. 34). The pre-judgment information is information obtained by the pre-judgment, and is "winning start information", information indicating whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, information indicating the type of the jackpot symbol if it is a jackpot, and a variation pattern of the special symbol. Information indicating the game state, information indicating the game state, and the like are included. "Winning start port information" was acquired when each random number stored in the same reserved storage area won a prize in either the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. It is information indicating whether or not. The pre-determination information including such information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number or the like used for the pre-determination.

When the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is executed, the information stored in the entry lower than the second reserved storage area 1031 is 1. It is shifted up by entry. For example, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 while the information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the first is 2 The information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

Such information shift processing is also performed in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the game machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, that is, information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. If so, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is prioritized prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034. Therefore, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030. Further, when the second special symbol determination is not reserved, that is, when only the first special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

[Structure example of effect control board 130]
As illustrated in FIG. 8, the effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, an RTC (real time clock) 134, and a random number circuit 135. The sub CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

The sub CPU 131 sets the production contents of various effects based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. For example, the effect content to be set may be determined by a lottery using various "random numbers for effect control" for determining the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 131 may accept the input of the operation information from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 and set the effect content according to the operation information. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect according to the set effect content to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

The “random number for effect control” is, for example, a random number that is appropriately updated in the random number circuit 135 when the timer interrupt process (described later) by the effect control board 130 is not performed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by generating a random number for effect control using the random number circuit 135, the processing load of the sub CPU 131 is reduced as compared with the case where the sub CPU 131 generates the random number.

Note that the sub CPU 131 may perform random number update processing for appropriately updating various effect control random numbers by using, for example, a loop count or the like in which "1" is added each time the timer interrupt process is performed by the effect control board 130.

[Structure example of image / acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the image / sound control board 140. The image / sound control board 140 controls the image display of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the effect sound output control of the speaker 24. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the image / sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, an acoustic ROM 146, and a SDRAM 147. , CGROM 148, and VRAM 149.

The control CPU 141 outputs image data stored in the CGROM 148 to the VDP 142 based on various tables such as a program stored in the control ROM 144, a display list creation table, a command received from the effect control board 130, and the like. Give instructions to display. This instruction is mainly given by the output of the display list.

Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing in frame units, and the type of the image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, and the rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list creation table is a table used to create this display list.

The control CPU 141 also instructs the acoustic DSP 143 to output the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

The control ROM 144 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a control program of the control CPU 141 and a display list generation program for generating a display list.

The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the integrated CPU 141 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The CGROM 148 stores the effect data necessary for executing the effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol, the effect associated with the jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 148 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and is a sprite data (one image data) or a plurality of image data composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). Movie data, etc. consisting of a collection of images is compressed and stored. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transmittance of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores the palette data or the like in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression.

It should be noted that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. Further, as a compression method of movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 149 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, an expanded storage area 1492, a frame buffer for a liquid crystal screen 1493, and the like.

The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the control CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores the image data expanded after being read from the CGROM 148. The liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 is used for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The frame buffer 1493 for a liquid crystal screen is a double buffer type memory having two buffers, and while the image data stored in one buffer is output for display, the next image data is stored in the other buffer. By drawing, the image data is drawn and displayed.

The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in the compressed state in the CGROM 148, and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. Further, the VDP 142 performs drawing processing on the liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 using the image data stored in the expanded storage area 1492 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. Further, the VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer in the VRAM 149, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the liquid crystal screen 5.

The acoustic DSP 143 is connected to an acoustic ROM 146 that stores various acoustic data related to music, voice, sound effects, etc., an SDRAM 147 that is used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143, and an amplifier 1431. The acoustic DSP 143 reads acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the control CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing (via the amplifier 1431) to the speaker 24. The amplifier 1431 adjusts the volume according to the instruction regarding the volume obtained from the control CPU 141 via the acoustic DSP 143, and outputs the acoustic data to the speaker 24. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, a production sound with a three-dimensional sound effect and a production without a three-dimensional sound effect so that the production sound can be heard from a position of a sound source virtually formed other than the position where the speaker 24 is installed. Output the acoustic data corresponding to the sound.

In this embodiment, the case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP is responsible for sound management will be described, but a configuration in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management may be adopted. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide an acoustic DSP.

[Configuration example of lamp control board 150]
As illustrated in FIG. 8, the lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152, the lamp CPU 151 includes a light emitting element provided in the effector 7, a panel lamp 25 (panel lamps 25A and 25B, a start port lamp 38, a large winning port lamp (not shown), and a V winning. Lamp (not shown)), frame lamp 37 (left side lamp 37A, right side lamp 37B, center lamp 37C, button lamp 262), effector motor 71 for operating effector 7, and effect button 26 are operated. Performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect button motor 261 and the like. Further, when the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated by the player, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command to notify the effect to the effect control board 130. Upon receiving the operation command, the effect control board 130 transmits a command for executing the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "operation effect start command") to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. .. The image / sound control board 140 can execute an effect by an image or sound on the liquid crystal screen 5 or the speaker 24 by receiving an operation effect start command. Further, the lamp control board 150 can execute an effect of causing various lamps to emit light by receiving an operation effect start command.

In the lamp ROM 152, for example, a light emission pattern for controlling light emission of each effect means and an operation pattern for controlling the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect accessory 7 are stored in advance. The emission pattern data includes, for example, information indicating the type of the lamp to be emitted, the emission color, the emission time, and the like. The lamp RAM 153 is used, for example, as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

The lamp CPU 151 uses the effect control board 130 to provide data (hereinafter, may be referred to as “image / acoustic control data”) for designating a light emission pattern (and operation pattern) of the effect related to the start for each start timing of the effect. It is received from the image / sound control board 140 via. For example, the lamp CPU 151 reads a light emission pattern (and an operation pattern) designated by the received data from the lamp ROM 152, temporarily stores (sets) it in the lamp RAM 153, and performs control based on the pattern. As a result, for example, control is realized in which each effect means emits light or operates in synchronization with (or asynchronously) the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

For example, the lamp CPU 151 receives light emission control based on the light emission pattern designated from the start of the variation effect in response to receiving data specifying the light emission pattern when the variation effect is started at the start timing of the variation effect. To execute. Further, for example, in response to receiving data for designating a light emission pattern for the reach effect at the start timing of the reach effect (for example, normal reach) described later, light emission control based on the light emission pattern specified from the start of the reach effect is received. To execute. Further, for example, in response to receiving data for designating the light emission pattern for the advance notice effect at the start timing of the advance notice effect (for example, premier cut-in) described later, it is based on the light emission pattern specified from the start of the advance notice effect. Performs light emission control.

The light emission pattern (and operation pattern) for each effect is not limited to the configuration in which the lamp RAM 153 is stored in a different area prepared in advance for each effect. For example, one area in the lamp RAM 153 is one or more effects. It may be used as an area for storing a light emission pattern or an operation pattern.

Further, the data related to the image / sound control may be data for collectively designating the light emission pattern (and the operation pattern) related to one or more effects. As an example, the lamp CPU 151 has a plurality of effects executed during a specific period (for example, during SPSP reach) after the predetermined effect at the timing when a predetermined effect (for example, SPSP reach described later) is started during the variable effect. Depending on the data that collectively specifies the light emission pattern corresponding to the above, the light emission control by the light emission pattern specified by this data may be performed during the specific period. Further, as another example, the lamp CPU 151 sets the lamp RAM 153 with a light emission pattern corresponding to all the effects executed during the current variation effect in response to receiving the data instructing the start of the variation effect. Therefore, the light emission control based on this light emission pattern may be performed during the variable effect.

The configuration of the gaming machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 11 is merely an example, and other configurations may be used. Further, the ratio described with reference to FIG. 9 is only an example, and any ratio may be used.

[About decorative symbols 501 and small symbols 502]
Next, an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 will be described. Here, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of hit notification and an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of loss notification.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. The decorative symbol 501 is displayed, for example, in the center of the screen. The decorative symbol 501 is composed of a left decorative symbol 501A, which is a decorative symbol in the left column, a middle decorative symbol 501B, which is a decorative symbol in the middle row, and a right decorative symbol 501C, which is a decorative symbol in the right column. In the present embodiment, the "decorative symbol" includes, for example, 1 symbol to 9 symbols showing the numbers 1 to 9.

The decorative symbol 501 starts to fluctuate with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbol. The combination of the numbers indicated by the three decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right that are stopped and displayed informs whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss. For example, if the determination result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, "hit notification" is performed, and if it is a loss, "loss notification" is performed.

In the "hit notification", for example, the left decoration is used so as to be a combination for notifying a jackpot (so-called doublet: 444 or the like (see FIGS. 12 (A), 19 (J), 21 (F))). The decorative symbol 501 is "temporarily stopped" in the order of the symbol 501A, the right decorative symbol 501C, and the middle decorative symbol 501B. The "temporary stop display" is to make a slight movement so as to sway in the vertical direction or to repeat slight enlargement and reduction without changing the display position of the decorative pattern. Further, in the hit notification, after the three decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols 501 are stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 12B and 21G). At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 (that is, the left small symbol which is the small symbol in the left column and the small symbol which is the small symbol in the middle row) is combined with the same number as the decorative symbol 501. , And the small symbol on the right, which is the small symbol in the right column) is displayed as a temporary stop (see FIG. 12 (A)). After that, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the combination of the three small symbols 502 is stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501 (see FIG. 12B). Here, the small symbol 502 is a symbol that starts to fluctuate with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbol. Similar to the decorative symbol, the "small symbol" includes 1 symbol to 9 symbols showing the numbers 1 to 9. The small symbol 502 is, for example, a symbol displayed at the lower left of the screen, and is an image smaller than the decorative symbol 501.

In the "loss notification", a combination for notifying a loss (so-called disjointed eyes (see FIG. 28 (A)) or reach loss eyes (see FIGS. 12 (C) and (D), FIGS. 23 (H) and (I))). For example, the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol 501A, the right decorative symbol 501C, and the middle decorative symbol 501B, and then the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 is basically changed. Stop display in the same mode as it is. At this time, along with the stop display of the three decorative symbols 501, the small symbol 502 (left small symbol, small and medium-sized symbol, and right small symbol) that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501 (. See FIG. 12 (D)). When the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination that notifies the loss, the small symbol 502 has a high speed from top to bottom in each of the three columns (that is, the left column, the middle column, and the right column). It is displayed in a variable manner so that it scrolls with. FIG. 12C exemplifies a state in which the small symbol 502 is variablely displayed at high speed when the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed by the combination of “434” which is a reach loss eye. In addition, as the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of notifying the loss, the small symbol 502 may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501.

As is clear from the above, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are common in that the variable display is started when the special symbol is started to be variable, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers.

However, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 differ in the following points. First, the decorative symbol 501 is usually displayed relatively large in the center of the screen, while the small symbol 502 is displayed relatively small in the lower left of the screen. Further, while the decorative symbol 501 may temporarily stop and display a part of the three rows of decorative symbols 501 during the variable display of the special symbol, the small symbol 502 has three rows of small symbols 502. Some of them will not be displayed as a temporary stop. For example, in the decorative symbol 501, the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C may be temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol 501B may be variablely displayed (so-called reach effect). On the other hand, in the small symbol 502, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are temporarily stopped and the small and medium-sized symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol. Even at times, the three columns of small symbols 502 remain variable and displayed without the temporary stop display. An example of reach production will be described later.

Further, the decorative symbol 501 may be partially or wholly hidden during the variable display of the special symbol, while the small symbol 502 may be partially or wholly hidden. No. For example, the medium decorative symbol 501B of the three rows of decorative symbols 501 may be hidden, whereas the small symbol 502 in the three rows is not partially hidden, and the medium decorative symbol is not displayed. Even while 501B is hidden, the small and medium-sized symbols are still displayed (variable display). An example of the effect in which the middle decorative symbol 501B out of the three decorative symbols 501 is hidden will be described later.

Further, the decorative symbol 501 may have a display mode (for example, shape or size) that changes depending on the situation of the variation effect, whereas the small symbol 502 has a display mode that changes depending on the situation of the variation effect. It doesn't change. For example, at the start of variable display of the decorative symbol 501, the decorative symbol 501 is composed of a combination of numbers and characters (not shown), and during a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), the character disappears and is composed of only numbers. .. The above numbers may change from European characters to Chinese characters, and vice versa. On the other hand, the small symbol 502 is composed only of numbers and is not configured in combination with a character like the decorative symbol 501. And, unlike the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 does not change from the combination of the character and the number to only the number.

Further, the decorative symbol 501 includes, in addition to the 1st to 9th symbols, a symbol (special symbol) for notifying that a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 18C)) is executed. ing. On the other hand, the small symbol 502 is composed of 1 symbol to 9 symbols and does not include a special symbol. The small symbol 502 may include the same special symbol as the decorative symbol 501, or may include a special symbol that is not included in the decorative symbol 501.

Further, while the decorative symbol 501 may change its display position depending on the situation of the variable effect, the small symbol 502 does not change its display position according to the situation of the variable effect. Specifically, the decorative symbol 501 is basically displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and may be displayed in the corner of the screen during the reach effect, for example. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 501A of the three decorative symbols 501 is moved to the upper left of the screen and displayed, and the right decorative symbol 501C of the three decorative symbols 501 is moved to the upper right of the screen and displayed. Be done. On the other hand, the display position of the small symbol 502 is fixed at the lower left of the screen.

Further, the transparency of the decorative symbol 501 may change depending on the situation of the variable effect, whereas the transparency of the small symbol 502 does not change depending on the situation of the variable effect. In other words, the visibility of the effect image on the back side of the decorative symbol 501 may change due to the change in the transparency of the decorative symbol 501. On the other hand, the effect image on the back side of the small symbol 502 is not always visible due to the small symbol 502.

In this way, the presence / absence of display and the display position do not change according to the situation of the variable effect, and the transparency does not change according to the situation of the variable effect. Therefore, even if the decorative symbol 501 changes and the visibility of the decorative symbol 501 deteriorates, the player sees the small symbol 502 to see the progress of the game (for example, the variable effect is being produced, or It is possible to easily grasp that the variation effect has been completed).

As the right decorative symbol 501C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 501A being temporarily stopped, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are combined with the same numbers as the two decorative symbols 501. It may be displayed as a temporary stop. In the following description, the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C that are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol are collectively referred to as "reach symbols". Further, a straight line connecting the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C that are temporarily stopped and displayed is called an effective line. If the small symbol 502 is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed as described above, the player can easily grasp the reach symbol by looking at the small symbol 502 even when the decorative symbol 501 is hidden. Will be possible. Further, in such a case, a special symbol (during normal variation display) is further displayed as a small and medium-sized symbol on a straight line connecting the left small symbol and the right small symbol (that is, the effective line of the small symbol 502) displayed temporarily. A small symbol that is not used) may be displayed as a temporary stop. This special symbol may be, for example, a special symbol for notifying that the jackpot symbol is always stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41 (hereinafter, may be described as "big hit confirmed"). Further, with the temporary stop display of the special symbol, the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like may be performed so that the frame member 3 or the like emits light in a color different from the rainbow color. This makes it possible to inform inconspicuously that the jackpot is confirmed.

It is not always necessary to display the small symbol 502 during the variation effect. For example, basically, the small symbol 502 may not be displayed, and the small symbol 502 may be displayed while the decorative symbol 501 is hidden or when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the small symbol 502 may include a special symbol.

Here, in the present embodiment, the "even-numbered symbol alignment" in which the same three even-numbered symbols are aligned means that the possibility of a time-saving hit is relatively high and the possibility of a probability variation hit is relatively low, which is the same. "Odd-numbered symbol alignment" in which three odd-numbered symbols are aligned means a probability variation hit (see FIG. 9B). For this reason, when the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) with even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, it is relatively high to the player that there is a relatively high possibility of shifting to the time reduction mode via the jackpot game related to the 6R time reduction. It is possible to recognize it. Further, when the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) having an odd number of symbols is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the mode is changed to the probability variation mode via the jackpot game related to the 6R probability variation. .. Even if it is a decorative symbol 501 with an even number of symbols, it is a jackpot related to 6R time reduction or a jackpot related to 6R probability variation depending on the combination of the decorative symbol 501 (and small symbol 502) and the fourth symbol (see FIG. 12 (A)). Whether or not it exists is uniquely notified. Here, the fourth symbol is expressed in color, and is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the decorative symbol 501 (and the special symbol), and then stopped and displayed at the same time as the decorative symbol 501 (and the special symbol). .. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, it is a jackpot related to the 6R probability variation when the even numbered symbol is aligned and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in "red", and the even symbol is aligned and the fourth symbol is displayed. When is stopped and displayed in "blue", it notifies that it is a big hit related to 6R time reduction (see FIG. 12 (B)). It should be noted that the fourth symbol is displayed on the front side of the other image and is displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized even if the effecting object 7 is operated, so that a part or all of the fourth symbol is not invisible. However, the fourth symbol is an image displayed smaller toward the edge of the liquid crystal screen 5 (for example, a square image having a side of 5 mm). Therefore, compared to the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502), the fourth symbol is displayed in an inconspicuous manner and is less likely to be noticed by the player. The fourth symbol may be realized by a light emitting element (for example, a full-color LED) provided near the right side of the liquid crystal display device 5. That is, this light emitting element is used as the fourth symbol by lighting it in the above color at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, and uniquely notifies whether it is a jackpot related to 6R time reduction or a jackpot related to 6R probability variation. You may.

In the variable display of the fourth symbol, for example, the fourth symbol of "red", "blue", and "yellow" is displayed at the same position in the order of red → blue → yellow → red → ... (for example, 0. It is realized by displaying each (for 2 seconds). Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol is to switch (that is, blink) the display state of the fourth symbol of a predetermined color (for example, blue) between display and non-display at regular time intervals (for example, every 0.2 seconds). May be realized by. In addition, when the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) of the combination for notifying the loss and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in "yellow", the loss is notified (see FIG. 12 (D)).

The fourth symbol of the present embodiment includes a fourth symbol for the first special symbol that synchronizes with (that is, corresponds to) the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol for the second special symbol that synchronizes with the variable display of the second special symbol. There are 4 symbols. For example, during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fourth symbol corresponding to the other special symbol may be controlled in the following modes. Specifically, the fourth symbol corresponding to the other special symbol may be hidden (see FIGS. 12A and 12C), and the other special symbol is not variablely displayed. It may remain stopped and displayed in the color to be notified (for example, green). For example, the color for notifying that the other special symbol is not variablely displayed may be the color when the fourth symbol corresponding to the other special symbol is stopped and displayed at the same time as the decorative symbol 501 of the combination for notifying the loss. good.

As shown in FIG. 12, on the liquid crystal screen 5, "holding icon 54", "the icon 53", "holding stage 540", and "a number indicating the number of holdings for special symbol determination" are displayed. The "hold icon 54" is an image showing the hold of the special symbol determination and suggesting the reliability of the hold jackpot. The “icon 53” is an image suggesting the possibility that a jackpot may be notified in the variable display during execution, and is an image that is erased at the stop display timing of the special symbol (see FIG. 12 (D)). The "holding stage 540" is an image for making the player recognize that the maximum number of holdings for the special symbol determination is 4 by showing a space in which four holding icons can be displayed. The hold icons 54 are displayed side by side from left to right above the hold stage in the order in which they are held by the number of special symbol determinations held (up to four in this embodiment). Thereby, the order of holding can be specified by the display position of the holding icon 54. For example, when a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination that is held first is performed, and the hold that is displayed on the far left. The icon 54 is shifted to the left and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, 1.1 times) and displayed as the icon 53. Here, the icon 53 is not displayed above the hold stage. Therefore, the hold icon 54 and the icon 53 can be easily distinguished from each other.

In the "number indicating the number of reserved special symbol determinations", a blue number indicating the number of reserved special symbol determinations and a blue number indicating the number of pending special symbol determinations, which are displayed in the vicinity of this number (immediately below in this embodiment), are displayed for the second special symbol determination. There is a red number indicating the number of holds. The above numbers are the same as the hold icon 54 in that the number of holds for special symbol determination can be specified. However, the hold icon 54 is different in that it suggests the reliability of the hold, whereas the above numbers do not suggest any reliability. Further, the above numbers are not hidden during the variation effect of the special symbol, whereas the hold icon 54 is different in that it may be hidden during the variation effect of the special symbol. The above numbers are smaller than the hold icon 54 and are displayed smaller toward the edge of the liquid crystal screen 5 (for example, a square image having a side of 5 mm). Therefore, compared to the hold icon 54, the above-mentioned numbers are displayed in an inconspicuous manner and are difficult for the player to notice.

[Flow of production in normal game state]
FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect in the normal gaming state. As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol determines the flow of the variation effect during the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. When it is started, it is determined by the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the sub CPU 131 sets the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern used in the variation display to the variation effect pattern random number (random number for effect control). One will be decided by lottery using one).

For example, in the sub ROM 132, one or a plurality of types of variation effect patterns are stored in advance in association with the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the presence or absence of execution of the reach effect is uniquely determined by determining the variation effect pattern when the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Then, for example, by determining the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed, the type of the reach effect to be executed is uniquely determined, and when a plurality of reach effects are executed, the execution order (FIG. 13 and 13 and). The flow shown in FIG. 9D) is also uniquely determined.

In the normal gaming state, the second starting opening 12 is more difficult to open than in the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, and the first starting opening 11 has a game ball more than the second starting opening 12. It is easier to win a prize. Here, the game ball hit right by the player basically wins only in the second starting opening 12 of the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player plays the game by hitting the left side aiming at the first starting port 11.

When the game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed. Then, after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. In the normal game state, the following variation effects are performed between the start of the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol.

Specific examples of various effects described with reference to FIG. 13 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14, 16, and 18 to 23.

Along with the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 501 is variablely displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the small symbol 502 is variablely displayed in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see, for example, FIG. 18A).

When the variable display of the decorative symbol 501 is started, the right decorative symbol 501C is temporarily stopped and displayed, for example, after the left decorative symbol 501A is temporarily stopped and displayed before all the decorative symbols 501 are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the right decorative symbol 501C is temporarily stopped and the same decorative symbol as the left decorative symbol 501A being temporarily stopped is displayed, reach is established (FIGS. 13 (a) → (b), for example, FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). B) See). On the other hand, if the same decorative symbol as the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C is not temporarily stopped and displayed, the reach is not established (FIGS. 13 (a) → (y)).

As described above, even when the reach is established and the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C are temporarily stopped, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are not temporarily stopped, and the three small symbols 502 are provisionally stopped. It remains variable without a stop display.

If the reach is not established, the three decorative symbols 501 are displayed in a variable manner, and then the loss notification is performed by a loose eye (FIG. 13 (z)). At this time, the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like is performed so that the frame member 3 or the like emits light in a color different from the rainbow color. In the present embodiment, when the reach is not established, for example, with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are not turned off and are synchronized with the rhythm of the BGM output from the speaker 24. Light emission control in a visible manner is continued (see FIG. 28 (A)).

On the other hand, when the reach is established (see FIG. 13B), the "reach effect" is performed in which the reach symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the left and right, and the intermediate decorative symbol 501B is variablely displayed. The reach effect is an effect in which the same decorative pattern as the reach pattern is expected to stop on the effective line as the medium decorative pattern 501B and become the same pattern.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eye after the reach effect is performed. In the present embodiment, when the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eye, all the effect means (specifically, the effect 7 and the board lamp) controlled to be able to emit light are accompanied by the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B. The light emission is suppressed so that the 25, the effect button 26, the frame lamp 37, and the start port lamp 38) are turned off (see, for example, FIG. 23 (H)). This extinguished state is continued until the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is stopped and displayed. Then, with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502), for example, the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in white for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). As described above, in the present embodiment, the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like during the loss notification differs depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the following effects during the variable effect (all of which will be described later), the following effect means among the effect means controlled to be capable of emitting light are controlled to emit rainbow colors. It should be noted that, other than the effect means for controlling the light emission to the rainbow color, the light may be emitted in a single color (for example, purple) or a plurality of colors (for example, yellow and green) other than the rainbow color, or may be turned off. .. Specifically, during the hit operation effect, the effect items 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamps 262 emit light in rainbow colors. Further, during the hit notification by matching the symbols (for example, from the victory effect to the start of the re-variation effect and during the success effect), the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors. Further, during the third pseudo-continuous production, the production effect 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors. Further, during the full rotation reach, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed in a mode of notifying that a jackpot has been determined by the special symbol determination (hereinafter, referred to simply as a "mode of simply notifying the jackpot"), the board lamp 25A and the board lamp 25A and the board lamp 25A during this effect. 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors. Further, when the button effect is executed in a mode of notifying the jackpot, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamp 262 emit light in rainbow colors during this effect. Further, when the icon change effect for changing the hold icon 54 or the icon 53 is executed in a mode of notifying a big hit or a mode of notifying that there is a hold determined to be a big hit, the board lamp 25A is performed during this effect. And 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the starting port lamp 38 emit light in rainbow colors. Further, the start port lamp 38 emits rainbow colors while the hold icon 54 or the icon 53 changed by the icon change effect of the above aspect is displayed.

The above-mentioned effects are effects that notify the player that they are big hits and that they are advantageous to the player. During such an effect, the effect means is controlled to emit rainbow colors as described above. On the other hand, during an effect other than the above effect during the variable effect (including the above effect other than the above-described aspect), the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 and the like emit light other than the rainbow color. Thereby, it can be suggested that the effecting means is controlled to emit rainbow colors, which is advantageous for the player. In the following explanation, the above effects (specifically, the hit motion effect, the hit notification by matching the symbols, the third pseudo-continuous effect, the full rotation reach, the cut-in effect, the button effect, and the icon change Light emission corresponding to effects other than production) is collectively referred to as "light emission corresponding to variable production". The light emission corresponding to the variable effect is the light emission in a light emission color other than the rainbow color. For example, the light emission during the loss notification is the light emission corresponding to the fluctuation effect.

The details of the reach production will be described below. In the present embodiment, "normal reach", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "full rotation reach" are prepared in advance as reach effects performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13). c)-(e), (q), and (w)).

As illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 9 (D), in the present embodiment, the normal reach is directly developed from the establishment of the reach (FIG. 13 (a) → (b) → (c)).
(Corresponding jackpot variation patterns: A1, A3, A6, A7, A10 to A13)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H0, H1, H3, H6, H7, H10, H11)

For example, the SP reach may be developed according to the following flow.
・ Flow from normal reach to SP reach (Fig. 13 (c) → (d))
(Corresponding jackpot fluctuation pattern: A3, A10 to A13)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H3, H10, H11)
・ Flow that directly develops from reach establishment to SP reach (Fig. 13 (a) → (b) → (d))
(Corresponding jackpot variation patterns: A2, A8, A9)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H2, H8, H9)

For example, the SPSP reach may be developed according to the following flow. In the present embodiment, two types of SPSP reach, "SPSP reach 1" and "SPSP reach 2", are prepared in advance (FIGS. 13 (e) and 13 (q)).
-Flow of development from normal reach to SPSP reach (Fig. 13 (c) → (e) or (q))
(Corresponding jackpot fluctuation pattern: A6, A7)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H6, H7)
-Flow of development from SP reach to SPSP reach (FIG. 13 (d) → (s) → (v) → (e) or (q))
(Corresponding jackpot fluctuation pattern: A8 to A13)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H8 to H11)
・ Flow that directly develops from reach establishment to SPSP reach (Fig. 13 (a) → (b) → (e) or (q))
(Corresponding jackpot fluctuation pattern: A4, A5)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H4, H5)

For example, the full rotation reach directly develops from the establishment of the reach (FIG. 13 (a) → (b) → (w)).
(Corresponding jackpot variation pattern: A14)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: None)

The "normal reach" (see FIG. 13 (c)) is, for example, a medium decorative symbol scrolled at high speed with the reach symbols (left decorative symbol 501A and right decorative symbol 501C) displayed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. This is an effect of slowing down the scroll speed of 501B (see, for example, FIG. 18 (I)). In the case of a big hit, after the medium decorative symbol 501B is slowly scrolled (that is, at the end of the normal reach), the medium decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the hit notification is performed by matching the symbols. Along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 temporarily stops and displays with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In the present embodiment, when the hit notification is performed by the symbol alignment following the normal reach, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors along with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B. .. This rainbow-colored light emission control is continued until the re-variation effect described later starts.

On the other hand, in the case of loss, at the end of the normal reach, the intermediate decorative symbol 501B having a number different from the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eye (FIG. 13 (r)). In this case, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501, which are the reach loss eyes, is stopped and displayed as it is without changing. Along with this, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed at the reach loss stitch of the same number combination as the decorative symbol 501. Along with these stop indications, the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in white.

If the intermediate decorative symbol 501B is slowly scrolled in the normal reach and then scrolled at high speed without displaying the temporary stop, it develops into SP reach or SPSP reach (FIGS. 13 (c) → (d), (e). , Or (q)). When developing into SP reach or SPSP reach, the intermediate decorative symbol 501B having a number different from the reach symbol may be temporarily stopped and then restarted (hereinafter referred to as "restart").

The normal reach is, for example, a reach effect that is easily executed in response to a loss variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short, although it may be executed in response to the jackpot variation pattern. Therefore, it can be said that the normal reach is a reach effect having a relatively low reliability (for example, a reliability of 3%).

In the present embodiment, when the light emission corresponding to the normal reach (one of the light emission corresponding to the fluctuation effect) is performed, various lamps (for example, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37) are emitted with a light emission color other than the rainbow color.

"SP reach" (see FIG. 13 (d)) is, for example, an effect in which one own character, which is an animation character, searches for a specific one character (for example, character E) (FIG. 13 (s)). For example, see FIG. 19 (B)). In the present embodiment, five target characters to be searched for are prepared (for example, characters A to E), and are preset so that the reliability of SP reach differs for each target character. For example, it is possible to make the player grasp the reliability of SP reach depending on the type of the target character, and the reliability is higher in the order of character A to character E.

In the SP reach, in the case of a big hit, for example, when the character finds the target character at the end of the SP reach, the "hit motion effect" is executed (FIG. 13 (t)). The "hit motion effect" is an effect of notifying that the big hit is confirmed by operating the effect item 7, and is an effect executed only when the big hit is achieved. For example, with the start of the hit motion effect, the effect object 7 operates from the initial position to the advance position. Further, with the operation of the effecting object 7, a rainbow-colored effect image that colors the periphery of the effecting object 7 is displayed on the entire screen of the liquid crystal screen 5. Further, the effecting object 7 emits light in rainbow colors from the start of the hitting operation effect (that is, when it is arranged at the initial position). The rainbow-colored light emission control of the effect 7 is continued until the end of the hit operation effect. The effect 7 returns from the advance position to the initial position at the end of the hit motion effect. At this time, the effector 7 continues to emit rainbow colors. The start timing at which the effecting object 7 emits rainbow-colored light may be the timing at which the effecting object 7 is arranged at the advancing position or the timing at which the effecting object 7 passes through a predetermined position between the initial position and the advancing position. .. In this case, during the period from the start of the hit operation effect to the start of the emission control of the effect item 7 in the rainbow color, the effect item 7 may be controlled to be in the extinguished state, or the effect object 7 may be controlled to be in a non-rainbow color state. It may emit light in a color (for example, white).

The icon 53, the hold icon 54, and the hold stage 540 are hidden with the start of the hit operation effect. These images are displayed again immediately before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, 2 seconds before).

In the present embodiment, during one variable display of the special symbol, the effect of the effect 7 operating while emitting light in a color other than the rainbow color can be executed a plurality of times (for example, the first or second pseudo-ream). The effect 7 operates when the effect is executed: see FIG. 18 (G). However, the effect of the effect 7 operating while emitting light in rainbow colors can be executed only once during one variation display of the special symbol for notifying the jackpot. It should be noted that the effect of the effect 7 operating while emitting light in rainbow colors may be executed only twice or twice or more during one variation display of the special symbol for notifying the jackpot. ..

In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors from the start of the hit motion effect to the end of the hit motion effect in order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. (See FIG. 19 (I)). Further, for example, from the start of the hit motion effect to the end of the hit motion effect, the effect button 26 remains in the normal state (or is controlled to the protruding state), and the button lamp 262 is made to appear to emit light in rainbow colors. Lights up in rainbow colors. In the present embodiment, the button lamp 262 emits light in rainbow colors in order to realize a powerful effect, although it is not an effective period during the hit operation effect.

Further, during the hit motion effect, the hit motion effect sound for notifying that the big hit is confirmed is output from the speaker 24 from the start of the hit motion effect to the end of the hit motion effect. With the start of the hit motion effect, the reach symbol (that is, the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C) in the temporary stop display and the intermediate decorative symbol 501B in the variable display are hidden. Further, during the hit operation effect, the small symbol 502 does not temporarily stop and remains displayed in a variable manner. With the start of the hit operation effect, the combination of the three small symbols 502 may be temporarily stopped and displayed so as to be a combination for notifying the jackpot with the same number as the reach symbol.

With the end of the hit motion effect shown in FIG. 13 (t), the display of the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C during the temporary stop display, which had been hidden, is resumed. Along with this, the intermediate decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a hit notification is performed by aligning the symbols (see FIG. 13 (u), for example, FIG. 19 (J)). Along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 temporarily stops and displays with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In the present embodiment, when the hit notification is performed by matching the symbols following the SP reach, three decorative symbols 501 of the same size are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line in the center of the screen with the end of the hit motion effect. .. At this time, since the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C were hidden until the end of the hit operation effect, it looks as if the three decorative symbols 501 were temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time. When the light emission control of the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C is started in rainbow color along with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B, these lamps are hit and the rainbow color is followed by the operation effect. It seems that it keeps emitting light. This rainbow-colored light emission control is continued until the re-variation effect described later starts.

If the SP reach does not result in a big hit, the SP reach is followed by the loss notification by the reach loss eyes (see FIGS. 13 (v), 19 (D), and (E)). At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B, the extinguishing control of all the effect means controlled so as to be able to emit light is performed. In addition, an effect display indicating that the own character could not find the target character is executed. When the SP reach is lost, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 that are the reach lost eyes is stopped and displayed as it is without changing. Along with this, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed at the reach loss stitch of the same number combination as the decorative symbol 501. Along with these stop indications, the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in white.

On the other hand, when the SP reach is developed from the SP reach, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is not stopped and displayed by this loss notification, and the middle decorative symbol 501B constituting the reach loss eye is restarted (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13). v) → (s) → (v) → (e) or (q)). At this time, the turn-off control of the effect means related to the loss notification started with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B ends as the intermediate decorative symbol 501B restarts. Along with this, light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like emit light in a color different from the rainbow color. It should be noted that the SPSP reach may be developed in the middle of the SP reach without going through the loss notification.

The SP reach is, for example, a reach effect that is easily executed in response to a loss variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is slightly longer, although it may be executed in response to the jackpot variation pattern. Therefore, it can be said that the SP reach is a reach effect with a medium reliability (for example, a reliability of 15%).

The SP reach of the present embodiment is composed of an effect of the own character searching for a target character and a hit motion effect (FIGS. 13 (s) and (t)). In the present embodiment, when the light emission corresponding to the SP reach (one of the light emission corresponding to the variable effect) is performed except for the hit operation effect, various lamps (for example, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37) emit light other than the rainbow color. It emits light in color. The hit motion effect does not have to be the effect that constitutes the SP reach.

In addition, as SP reach, a reach effect having an effect content different from the above-mentioned effect content may be prepared in advance. For example, the SP reach may be an effect in which the character performs an action to destroy a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol so that the decorative symbol different from the reach symbol does not stop as the medium decorative symbol 501B. In such SP reach, for example, if the character succeeds in destroying a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol, a hit notification is performed by matching the symbols, and if the character fails to destroy the decorative symbol different from the reach symbol, the character loses due to the reach loss. Notification is performed.

"SPSP reach" is a production that takes a longer time than normal reach and SP reach, and is a reach production with higher reliability than normal reach and SP reach. The SPSP reach is difficult to execute when the result of the special symbol determination is lost, and is easy to execute when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. Therefore, the reliability of SPSP reach is relatively high, for example, 40%. The SPSP reach is, for example, a reach effect that is easily executed corresponding to a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long.

“SPSP reach 1” (see FIG. 13 (e)), which is one of the SPSP reach, is, for example, an effect in which the character of the animation or CG and the enemy fight (see, for example, FIGS. 20 to 23). In this embodiment, the reliability of SPSP reach 1 is set in advance so that the reliability of SPSP reach 1 is different for each enemy in which the character fights. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of enemy A to enemy F. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the reliability of SPSP reach 1 depending on the type of enemy.

In SPSP Reach 1, for example, a battle is first started between one own character holding a weapon (iron ball in this embodiment) and one of the six enemies A to F (an enemy of any one) (SPSP Reach 1). 13 (f), see, for example, FIG. 20 (A)). After that, during the battle between the own character and the enemy, which is the timing in the middle of SPSP reach 1, one of the characters A to C participates in the battle as an ally of the own character (Fig. 20 (E). )reference). In this embodiment, the reliability of SPSP reach 1 is set in advance so as to be different for each character participating in the war. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of characters A to C. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the reliability of SPSP reach 1 depending on the type of the participating character.

In addition, here, the production (FIGS. 13 (l) to (p)) of the final stage of SPSP reach 1 will be described. The specific flow of the production from the start of SPSP reach 1 to the middle stage will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 (f) to 13 (k). In the case of a big hit, the same hit motion effect as shown in FIG. 13 (t) is executed at the end of SPSP reach 1 (FIGS. 13 (f) to (k) → (l)). Since the effect mode of the hit motion effect is the same between the SPSP reach 1 and the SP reach, the description thereof is omitted here. It should be noted that the SPSP reach 1 and the SP reach may have different production modes of the hit motion effect. For example, the execution time of the hit motion effect may be longer in the SPSP reach 1 than in the SP reach.

Following the hit motion effect according to FIG. 13 (l), the effect of notifying that the jackpot is confirmed is performed, and the "victory effect" in which the character defeats the enemy and wins is performed (FIG. 13 (m), See FIG. 21 (C). Along with this, the intermediate decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a hit notification is performed by aligning the symbols (see FIG. 13 (l) → (m), for example, FIG. 21 (C)). The reach symbol is displayed small in the upper corner of the screen, while the intermediate decorative symbol 501B is displayed large in the center of the screen (see FIG. 21 (C)). Along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 temporarily stops and displays with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A are accompanied by the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B so that the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C can be seen to continue to emit rainbow colors following the operation effect. And 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit rainbow colors. This rainbow-colored light emission control is continued until the re-variation effect described later starts. The rainbow-colored light emission control between the effect object 7 and the button lamp 262, which was started with the start of the hit operation effect, ends with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B.

It should be noted that the victory effect ends when the own character and the enemy are erased between the time when the intermediate decorative symbol 501B is temporarily stopped and displayed and the time when the re-variation effect starts. Along with this, three decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line in the center of the screen (see FIG. 13 (n), for example, FIG. 21 (D)). At the same time, the word "victory" is displayed to inform the victory of the own character. In the small symbol 502, three small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line of the small symbol 502 from the time when the temporary stop display is started in accordance with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B.

On the other hand, if a "loss suggestion" is made in which the character is defeated by the enemy at the end of SPSP reach 1, the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eyes (FIGS. 13 (f) to (k) → (o). → (p), see, for example, FIGS. 23 (G) and (H)). The loss suggestion may be executed not only in the case of loss but also in the case of a big hit. It should be noted that the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit blue light in accordance with the suggestion of loss. Following the light emission control in blue, the extinguishing control of all the effect means controlled to enable light emission is performed along with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B. In the case of loss, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 that have reached the reach loss is stopped and displayed as it is without changing. Along with this, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed at the reach loss stitch of the same number combination as the decorative symbol 501. Along with these stop indications, the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in white.

When a loss suggestion is made in the case of a big hit, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is not stopped and displayed in the loss notification following the loss suggestion, and is the same as the hit operation effect shown in FIG. 13 (t). The hit motion effect is executed (FIG. 13 (o) → (p) → (l)). At this time, the extinguishing control of the effect means related to the loss notification, which was started with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B, ends with the start of the hit operation effect. Along with this, the effector 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamps 262 are emitted in rainbow colors. When the hit motion effect is started via the loss suggestion (and the loss notification), the reach loss eye during the temporary stop display is hidden with the start of the hit motion effect. It is different from the start of the hit motion effect (FIG. 13 (l)) that is executed without. It should be noted that the small symbol 502 remains variable and displayed without the temporary stop display, as in the case of the hit operation effect that is executed without suggesting a loss.

With the end of the hit motion effect via the loss suggestion, the victory effect is executed (FIG. 13 (o) → (p) → (l) → (m)). Along with this, the display of the reach symbol during the temporary stop display, which has been hidden, is resumed, and the intermediate decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily displayed. As a result, the hit notification is performed by aligning the symbols (FIG. 13 (n)). Along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 temporarily stops and displays with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In this way, the flow of the production that makes the jackpot appear as if it has been revived by notifying the hit through the suggestion of loss is called "revival hit". On the other hand, the flow of the production of notifying the hit report without the suggestion of loss is called "direct hit". Since the flow after the victory production is the same for the resurrection hit and the direct hit, the explanation here is omitted. It should be noted that the three decorative symbols 501 may be changed to an odd-numbered symbol alignment with the end of the hit operation effect via the loss suggestion, and the hit notification may be performed by the odd-numbered symbol alignment.

In the present embodiment, during the SPSP reach 1, various lamps (for example, a board lamp) are emitted when the light emission corresponding to the SPSP reach 1 (one of the light emission corresponding to the variable effect) is performed except during the hit operation effect and the victory effect. 25 and the frame lamp 37) are emitted with a light emitting color other than the rainbow color.

As a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the winning effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 may be temporarily stopped with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. As a result, following the rainbow-colored light emission control accompanying the start of the winning effect, the winning notification is performed by the matching of the decorative symbols 501 and the small symbols 502.

"SPSP Reach 2" (see FIG. 13 (q)), which is one of the SPSP reach, has the theme of friendship between the character of the animation or CG and one of the characters A to E, for example. (Not shown). In the present embodiment, the reliability of the SPSP reach 2 is set in advance so that the reliability of the SPSP reach 2 is different for each character to which the own character confirms the friendship with each other. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of the characters A to E. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the reliability of SPSP reach 2 depending on the type of the character that is the opponent of the own character. The SPSP reach 2 is, for example, a reach effect having a lower reliability than the SPSP reach 1 but a higher reliability than the normal reach and the SP reach.

In the case of a big hit, the own character succeeds in communicating with the opponent's character at the end of SPSP reach 2, and the hit notification is performed by matching the symbols (see FIG. 13 (r)). On the other hand, in the case of loss, at the end of SPSP reach 2, the minds of the own character and the opponent's character pass each other, and finally the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eye. Since the light emission control at the time of hit notification and loss notification in SPSP reach 2 is the same as that of SPSP reach 1, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the "revariation effect" is executed following the hit notification (FIGS. 13 (n), (r), and (u)) when the normal reach, the SP reach, or the SPSP reach is executed. .. Further, following the revariation effect, a "success effect" or a "failure effect" (not shown) as a result of the revariation effect is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 21 (D) to (F)).

In the "re-variation effect", the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination for notifying the jackpot (hereinafter, referred to as a "big hit mode"), and then the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode. Is restarted, and it is an effect that the decorative symbol 501 is expected to change to an odd number of symbols. In the present embodiment, with the start of the re-variation effect, the three decorative symbols 501 are restarted in a recognizable manner while the three decorative symbols 501 are synchronized in the aspect of the symbol alignment (for example, the aspect of the symbol alignment is maintained). Slowly change from 444 to 555 to 666 (see FIG. 21E). In this embodiment, the small symbol 502 is not restarted during the re-variation effect, and the temporary stop display is continued with the combination of the numbers temporarily stopped immediately before the start of the re-variation effect (see FIG. 21 (E)). ). In this respect, it differs from the display mode of the small symbol 502 during full rotation reach, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C is performed so that the entire gaming machine appears to emit white light from the start to the end of the re-variation effect.

In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the even-numbered symbol alignment is restarted by the re-variation effect and changes to the odd-numbered symbol alignment (hereinafter, such a change is referred to as "promotion"). By promoting by the re-variation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a probability change hit, and to recognize that the player shifts to the probability change mode (that is, the probability change game state) through the jackpot game. Is possible.

The "successful effect" is an effect indicating that the decorative symbol 501 with an odd number of symbols is displayed in the revariable effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed with odd-numbered symbols aligned with the start of the successful effect (see FIG. 21 (F)). Then, after that, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 is stopped and displayed as it is without changing (see FIG. 21 (G)). At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same odd number combination as the decorative symbol 501. After that, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in the same odd number combination as the decorative symbol 501.

In the success effect, a "rainbow-colored concentrated line image" (not shown) that emphasizes the decorative pattern 501 is displayed, and a success effect sound such as "Pukeen" is output from the speaker 24. The "rainbow-colored concentrated line image" is, for example, an image representing a rainbow-colored concentrated line arranged radially from the center of the intermediate decorative pattern 501B. The rainbow-colored concentrated line image continues to be displayed from the start of the success effect until the decorative symbol 501 stopped and displayed is erased (specifically, until the start of the jackpot game). Further, the success effect sound is output from the start of the success effect until the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame so that the entire gaming machine can be seen as rainbow-colored from the start of the successful production to the predetermined timing after the successful production (for example, the start of the first round game). Lamps 37A to C are emitted in rainbow colors.

The "failure effect" is an effect indicating that the decorative symbol 501 with an even number of symbols is displayed in the revariable effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed with even-numbered symbols aligned with the start of the failure effect (not shown). Then, after that, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 is stopped and displayed as it is without changing. At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same even number combination as the decorative symbol 501. After that, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in the same even number combination as the decorative symbol 501. When the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is stopped and displayed, the current variation effect ends and the jackpot game related to the 6R time reduction or the jackpot game related to the 6R probability variation is started.

In the failure effect, a "white concentrated line image" (not shown) that emphasizes the decorative pattern 501 is displayed, and a failure effect sound such as "cashan" is output from the speaker 24. The "white concentrated line image" is, for example, an image showing a white concentrated line arranged radially from the center of the intermediate decorative pattern 501B. The white concentrated line image continues to be displayed until the stopped and displayed decorative symbol 501 is erased (specifically, until the start of the jackpot game). Further, the failure effect sound is output from the start of the failure effect until the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed is 6R probability variation, the probability that the failure effect is executed is set in advance so as to be relatively very low (for example, 1%). Therefore, it can be said that the failure effect in the present embodiment is an effect suggesting that the possibility of a time saving hit is relatively very high and the possibility of a probability variation hit is relatively low. In addition, the failure effect is relatively likely to shift to the time-saving mode (that is, the time-saving game state) via the jackpot game, and may shift to the probability-changing mode (that is, the probability-changing game state) via the jackpot game. Is a production that suggests that is relatively very low. In the case of 6R probability variation, the failure effect may not be executed, and the success effect may be executed without fail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the board lamp so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit blue light from the start of the failure effect to the predetermined timing after the end of the failure effect (for example, at the start of the first round game). The 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in blue.

It should be noted that the re-variation effect may be executed when the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are temporarily stopped and displayed with the odd-numbered symbols aligned in the hit notification. In this case, the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are always stopped and displayed with odd-numbered symbols aligned. As described above, when the decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the odd-numbered symbols aligned, it is confirmed that the decorative symbols 501 are always stopped and displayed with the odd-numbered symbols aligned through the revariating effect. Therefore, when the temporary stop display is performed with an odd number of symbols aligned, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C may be made to emit rainbow colors from the start to the end of the re-variation effect. As a result, the rainbow-colored light emission control related to the hit notification started with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B continues even during the re-variation effect, and the predetermined value after the success effect following the re-variation effect is completed. There is no interruption until the timing (for example, at the start of the 1st round game). If it is not necessary to make the presence or absence of the re-variation effect different depending on whether the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) temporarily stopped and displayed in the hit notification is an even number or an odd number, the effect time of the variation effect corresponding to the same variation pattern is re-variable effect. There is no need to adjust depending on the presence or absence of. As a result, even if any of the even-numbered symbols and the odd-numbered symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed by the hit notification, it is possible to execute each effect related to the variation effect at the same timing corresponding to the same variation pattern. be.

In addition, when the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is temporarily stopped and displayed with an odd number of symbols aligned in the hit notification, it is not necessary to execute the re-variation effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the re-variation effect in which the mode of pattern alignment is completely unlikely to change. For example, the odd-numbered intermediate decorative symbol 501B, which is the same as the reach symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the hit notification is performed by the odd-numbered symbol alignment. Then, after that, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 is stopped and displayed as it is without changing. At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same odd number combination as the decorative symbol 501. After that, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in the same odd number combination as the decorative symbol 501. The panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow colors along with the temporary stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B. This rainbow-colored light emission control may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the jackpot game) after the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed, or may be terminated before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed. ..

"Full rotation reach" (see FIG. 13 (w)) is a reach effect with 100% reliability for notifying that the probability variation hit is confirmed (that is, the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R probability variation is always displayed as a stop). .. The full rotation reach synchronizes the same left decorative symbol 501A, middle decorative symbol 501B, and right decorative symbol 501C, for example, when the combination of "111" is displayed, the combination of "222" is displayed next. It is a reach effect that allows you to scroll slowly while keeping the pattern aligned.

During full rotation reach, for example, the decorative symbol 501 is displayed as a translucent image so that another image (for example, the own character) behind the decorative symbol 501 can be seen. The small symbol 502 in full rotation reach is slowly scrolled in the same pattern as the left small symbol, the small and medium-sized symbol, and the right small symbol in synchronization with the decorative symbol 501. It should be noted that the small symbol 502 may continue to be variablely displayed at high speed until the end of the full rotation reach (for example, at the start of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501).

In the present embodiment, at the end of the full rotation reach, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 show a 7 symbol. A stop display is performed along with the stop display of (see FIG. 13 (x)).

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are always aligned with 7 symbols via the full rotation reach, and the temporary stop display or the stop display is not performed except for the 7 symbols aligned. For this reason, for example, when the temporary stop display is performed with an even number of symbols, it is not necessary to execute an effect such as changing to a 7 symbol alignment, and the variation pattern A14 is supported depending on the type of the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) temporarily stopped. There is no need to adjust the production time of the variable production. For this reason, when the full rotation reach is executed, a configuration is adopted in which the execution of the revariation effect and the success effect (or failure effect) is restricted. It should be noted that the revariation effect and the success effect may be executed even when the full rotation reach is executed.

In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps so that the entire gaming machine can be seen as rainbow-colored from the start of the full rotation reach to the predetermined timing after the end of the full rotation reach (for example, at the end of the jackpot game). 37A to C emit rainbow colors. Further, for example, a rainbow-colored effect image (for example, a rainbow-colored effect image displayed along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen, or a rainbow-colored character with "full rotation") is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

The full rotation reach is a reach effect that is executed only in the case of a probability variation hit, and is a reach effect that is not executed in the case of a time saving hit or a loss. In the present embodiment, the full rotation reach is executed corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A14 (see FIG. 9D) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long.

Regardless of the type of big hit, the full rotation reach may be executed in both the case of the probability variation hit and the case of the time saving hit.

The full rotation reach in the present embodiment is started when the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 18C) described later is executed three times, but the normal reach, the SP reach, or the SPSP reach is changed to the full rotation reach. It may develop.

In the present embodiment, the reliability may be determined in advance in the order of normal reach <SP reach <SPSP reach <full rotation reach, and the reliability of these effects may be any value.

Further, even during the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state and the variable display of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the effect described with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 13 and 13 is performed. May be good.

[Example of variable effect in which SPSP reach 1 is executed]
An example of a specific production from the start of SPSP reach 1 to the middle stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 (f) to 13 (p). An example of a specific effect mode of the entire variable effect including the SPSP reach 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and later.

The SPSP reach 1 of the present embodiment branches its effect content based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Specifically, SPSP Reach 1 is based on the judgment result of the first special symbol determination, for example, the type of enemy that the character fights against, whether or not the battle is advantageous for the character, and the battle as an ally of the character. It branches into the production contents such as the type of character participating in the battle, whether the winner of the battle is the own character, and so on. The scenario of what kind of effect content to branch to is determined in advance at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the rough scenario of SPSP reach 1 is determined by the variation effect pattern determined by the effect control board 130 corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. For example, once the variable effect pattern that can execute SPSP reach 1 is determined, the type of enemy that the character fights against is uniquely determined.

SPSP Reach 1 can be any production, but the more advantageous the character is, the higher the player's expectation for victory (that is, the expectation for the jackpot), and conversely, the more disadvantageous the character is, the more anxious the player is about defeat. The feeling (that is, the feeling of anxiety about loss) will increase.

In the present embodiment, when the SPSP reach 1 is started, the battle between the own character and the enemy is started (after FIG. 13 (f)), and the variation effect proceeds in the following flow.

At the timing at the start of the battle illustrated in FIG. 13 (f), one of a plurality of enemies A to F is displayed on the LCD screen 5 as an opponent of the own character (FIG. 20 (A). )reference). Immediately below the enemy character, for example, the name of the enemy character and the "reliability display" consisting of one or more golden stars are displayed. The reliability display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation of victory, which is the high possibility that the character will win the enemy, and suggests the high degree of reliability. In the reliability display for displaying the golden star exemplified in FIG. 20 (A), the total number of the golden star and the white star indicates the maximum value of the reliability (5 in this embodiment). The higher the number of golden stars, the higher the reliability, and the smaller the number of golden stars, the lower the reliability. Therefore, the player can recognize the high or low reliability by the number of golden stars.

The reliability display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be any one. For example, there may be a reliability display of probability variation hit confirmation, or there may be a reliability display of victory confirmation (that is, jackpot confirmation). For example, the reliability display of displaying five rainbow-colored stars means that the jackpot is confirmed, and when five rainbow-colored stars are displayed, the predetermined timing (for example, the hit operation effect) from the start of the reliability display to the subsequent predetermined timing Until the start), the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like may be performed so that the frame member 3 or the like emits light in rainbow colors.

In addition, instead of the display suggesting the degree of expectation of victory, the degree of danger indicating the degree of danger that the own character is likely to be defeated by the enemy may be displayed.

Following the display of the enemy or the like according to FIG. 13 (f), it is suggested that the route shifts to one of the advantageous "own character advantageous route" and the disadvantageous "own character disadvantageous route" for the own character. "Pushing effect" is executed (see FIG. 13 (g)). After the push-and-push effect, the route shifts to the own character advantageous route (see FIG. 13 (i)) or the own character disadvantageous route (see FIG. 13 (h)).

The “pushing effect” according to FIG. 13 (g) is an effect of executing an effect display in which the own character and the enemy press each other (see FIG. 20 (B)). As a result of pushing each other, when the own character pushes the enemy completely, it shifts to the "own character advantageous route", and when the own character is pushed completely by the enemy, it shifts to the "own character disadvantageous route" (see FIGS. 13 (i) and 13 (h)). ).

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the red effect image that is the background of the own character occupying the liquid crystal screen 5 and the ratio of the blue effect image that is the background of the enemy occupying the liquid crystal screen 5 are changed during the pressing effect. As a result, an effect display is executed in which red and blue are pressed against each other. Further, light emission control for changing the range of the red light emitting portion and the blue light emitting portion of the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C is performed so as to be synchronized with this effect display.

Specifically, for example, at the start of the pressing effect, the left half of the LCD screen 5 is occupied by the own character and the red effect image, and the right half is occupied by the enemy and the blue effect image (FIG. 20 (FIG. 20). B) See). When the character pushes the enemy, the red effect image expands to the right and the range of the red effect image expands. Immediately after that, the character is pushed by the enemy, and the blue effect image expands to the left and the range of the blue effect image expands. Such an effect display in which the own character and the enemy push each other is executed alternately.

In synchronization with this, the red light emitting part such as the frame lamps 37A to C extends to the right and the red light emitting part expands, and the blue light emitting part such as the frame lamps 37A to C extends to the left and the blue light emitting part spreads. The production is performed alternately. As a result, it seems that red and blue are pressed against each other in synchronization with the movement of the character and the enemy on the LCD screen 5.

The "own character advantageous route" according to FIG. 13 (i) is a route that suggests that the own character is advantageous, the possibility that the own character wins the battle is relatively high, and the reliability is relatively high. be. For example, when the route shifts to the own character advantageous route, the effect display in which the own character attacks the enemy first is executed (see FIG. 20 (C)).

In the present embodiment, for example, when it is a big hit, it is easier to shift to the own character advantageous route than when it is lost. For this reason, when shifting to the own character advantageous route, the player may watch the future of the battle with a sense of expectation and excitement that it may be a big hit.

On the other hand, in the "own character disadvantageous route" according to FIG. 13 (h), the own character is disadvantageous, the possibility that the own character is defeated in the battle is relatively high, and the reliability is relatively low. It is a route that suggests. For example, when the route shifts to the disadvantageous route of the own character, the effect display in which the enemy attacks the own character first is executed (not shown).

In the present embodiment, for example, it is easier to shift to the own character disadvantageous route when a loss occurs than when a big hit occurs. For this reason, when shifting to the disadvantageous route of the own character, the player may watch the future of the battle while feeling anxiety and impatience that it may be lost.

It should be noted that during the pressing effect, the effect sound such as BGM and character lines may not be output from the speaker 24 as much as possible (or at all), so that the effect on the screen may be paid attention to. As an example, when the BGM related to the SPSP reach 1 is output, the output of the BGM is stopped with the start of the pressing effect. Then, with the end of the pressing effect, the output of the BGM is restarted from a specific reproduction position. For example, when shifting to the own character disadvantageous route, the output of the above BGM is restarted at the first volume from the position where the output was stopped, and when shifting to the own character advantageous route, rust is performed at the second volume larger than the first volume. The output of the BGM may be restarted from the portion.

By the way, SPSP reach 1 is an effect that suggests high or low reliability by a plurality of branches such as the type of enemy and the result of the pressing effect. Here, if the production progresses steadily, the SPSP reach 1 becomes monotonous, and the player may not notice even if there is some reliability suggestion because the production is not enthusiastic. ..

Here, in the present embodiment, in any route of the own character advantageous route and the own character disadvantageous route, any of the three characters (that is, characters A to C) as the ally of the own character is in the battle. It is suggested that the reliability is high or low depending on whether or not the player participates (see FIG. 15 (A)). Therefore, in this embodiment, just before the ally of the own character participates in the battle, a "cut-in effect" that emphasizes and displays the character participating in the battle in a short time is executed once, and some reliability is suggested. It makes it easier for the player to immediately grasp what has been done (see FIG. 13 (j)). The cut-in effect is one of the "notice effects", and the advance notice effect is, for example, the variation display and reach of the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) among the effects based on the determination result of the special symbol determination or the prior determination information. It is a production other than the production. The mode of the cut-in effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following the cut-in effect according to FIG. 13 (j), the button effect is executed at the end of the battle (that is, the end of SPSP reach 1) (see FIG. 13 (k)). In the present embodiment, when the SPSP reach 1 is executed, the button effect is always executed at the end of the SPSP reach 1. The appearance timing of the button effect at the end of SPSP reach 1 is uniquely determined according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. A more specific mode of the button effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, but the button effect of the present embodiment has three effect modes in which the emission color of the button lamp 262 is different. One of the effect modes is a mode in which the button lamp 262 emits rainbow-colored light (hereinafter, referred to as “premier button effect”) (see FIG. 16C). The premier button effect is performed only when it is a big hit. Here, the button effect may be executed a plurality of times at a timing before SPSP reach 1, such as before the reach is established or during the normal reach. However, if the premier button effect appears at an early timing, the player who recognizes that it will be a big hit will not feel the excitement of whether or not it is a big hit in the subsequent effect. Further, if the premier button effect appears many times during the variable display of one special symbol, not only the effect itself loses its special feeling, but also the player may get bored.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the premier button effect can be executed only once at the end of SPSP reach 1 in one special symbol variation display, and a configuration is adopted in which the premier button effect does not appear at a timing before that. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while feeling a feeling of excitement until the end of SPSP Reach 1. In addition, the premier button production can be made into a rare production. The premier button effect may be executed before the reach is established, when the reach is established, or during the reach effect other than SPSP reach 1 (for example, during the normal reach or the full rotation reach). Further, the premier button effect may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol.

The valid period ends at a predetermined end timing (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button effect) in response to or without the operation of the effect button 26 during the button effect according to FIG. 13 (k). In response to this, a hit motion effect or a loss suggestion is performed (FIGS. 13 (l) and (o)). When the hit operation effect is executed following the button effect, it is a direct hit (FIG. 13 (k) → (l) → (m) → (n)). On the other hand, when a loss suggestion is performed following the button effect, it is a loss (FIG. 13 (k) → (o) → (p)) or a resurrection hit (FIG. 13 (k) → (o) → (p). ) → (l) → (m) → (n)). Since the specific flow of production after the final stage of SPSP reach 1 (that is, FIGS. 13 (f) to 13 (p)) has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

[Example of cut-in production]
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a cut-in effect executed during SPSP reach 1. The "cut-in effect" according to FIG. 13 (j) shows the player a high or low reliability by displaying an effect image showing the character illustrated in FIG. 14 during SPSP reach 1 (during battle). It is a notice production that can be grasped. In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect can be executed once during one variable effect in which the SPSP reach 1 is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, four types of cut-in effect, weak cut-in, medium cut-in, strong cut-in, and premier cut-in, are prepared in advance. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, the reliability of these four types of cut-in effects is different from each other, and for example, the reliability is high in the order of weak cut-in <medium cut-in <strong cut-in <premier cut-in.

As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (A-1) and 14 (A-2), the weak cut-in is, for example, the face of the character A and the blue character "End" (hereinafter, the blue character is "blue character"). The weak cut-in image 55 superimposed on the horizontally elongated rectangular pale blue effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. When a weak cut-in is executed, character A always appears during the battle (during SPSP reach 1). For example, the weak cut-in image 55 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image related to the battle (SPSP reach 1) for 1 second immediately before the character A participates in the battle as an ally of the own character.

Further, the weak cut-in is, for example, an effect of outputting the line of the character A (hereinafter, referred to as “weak cut-in sound”) that says “it is the end” from the start of displaying the weak cut-in image 55 from the speaker 24 for 1 second. Is.

In the present embodiment, the light emission control related to the cut-in effect is executed with priority over the light emission control of the variable light emission corresponding to the SPPS reach 1. Therefore, during the weak cut-in, as illustrated in FIG. 14 (A-2), the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit blue light for 1 second from the start of displaying the weak cut-in image 55. Light emission control is performed to make the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit blue light. Before and after the execution of the weak cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPPS reach 1.

As described above, as a weak cut-in, for example, blue characters and a pale blue effect image are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like is performed so that the frame member 3 or the like looks blue. For this reason, the weak cut-in is an effect expressed in blue as a whole, and the characteristic color representing the characteristics of the weak cut-in can be said to be blue.

As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (B-1) and (B-2), the medium cut-in is, for example, the face of the character B and the green character "not lose" (hereinafter, the green character is "green character"). The medium cut-in image 56 superimposed on the horizontally elongated rectangular light green effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. When the medium cut-in is executed, character B will always appear during the battle (during SPSP reach 1). For example, the medium cut-in image 56 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image related to the battle for 1.5 seconds immediately before the character B participates in the battle as an ally of the own character.

Further, the middle cut-in outputs, for example, the line of the character B (hereinafter referred to as “medium cut-in sound”) that “does not lose” from the start of displaying the middle cut-in image 56 from the speaker 24 for 1.5 seconds. It is a production to do.

As illustrated in FIG. 14 (B-2), during the middle cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit green light for 1.5 seconds from the start of displaying the middle cut-in image 56. Light emission control is performed to make the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit green light. Before and after the execution of the middle cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPPS reach 1.

In this way, as the middle cut-in, for example, green characters and a light green effect image are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like is performed so that the frame member 3 or the like looks green. Therefore, it can be said that the medium cut-in is an effect expressed in green as a whole, and the characteristic color representing the characteristics of the medium cut-in is green.

As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (C-1) and 14 (C-2), the strong cut-in is, for example, the face of the character C and the red character "Gekiatsu" (hereinafter, the red character is "red character"). The strong cut-in image 57 superimposed on the effect image of the rectangular zebra pattern elongated in the vertical direction is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, the red characters displayed in the strong cut-in are relatively large characters, which are at least larger than the blue characters related to the weak cut-in and the green characters related to the medium cut-in. When a strong cut-in is executed, character C will always appear during the battle (during SPSP reach 1). For example, the strong cut-in image 57 is superimposed and displayed for 1.8 seconds on the front side of the production image related to the battle immediately before the character C participates in the battle as an ally of the own character (see FIG. 22 (D)).

Further, the strong cut-in outputs, for example, the line of the character C called "Gekiatsu" (hereinafter referred to as "strong cut-in sound") from the speaker 24 for 1.8 seconds from the start of displaying the strong cut-in image 57. It is a production to do.

As illustrated in FIG. 14 (C-2), during the strong cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit red light for 1.8 seconds from the start of displaying the strong cut-in image 57. Light emission control is performed so that the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit light in red. Before and after the execution of the strong cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPPS reach 1.

As described above, as a strong cut-in, for example, relatively large red characters are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like is performed so that the frame member 3 or the like looks red. For this reason, the strong cut-in is an effect expressed in red as a whole, and the characteristic color representing the characteristics of the strong cut-in can be said to be red.

By the way, if the cut-in effect is configured to only display the characters appearing in the SPSP reach 1, the player may become accustomed to the cut-in effect and may not feel a sense of excitement in the subsequent development. However, if a character unrelated to the battle is displayed by a cut-in effect instead of the character participating in the battle, the effect may be complicated and difficult to understand.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a cut-in effect, the premier character D that notifies that the jackpot is confirmed although it does not participate in the battle instead of the character participating in the battle is set for a relatively short time (in this embodiment). By executing the premier cut-in to be displayed (for 0.8 seconds), the cut-in effect is made into an unexpected effect (see FIG. 14 (D-1)).

Here, the premier character D functions as a character that notifies that the jackpot is confirmed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. The player who notices that the jackpot is confirmed by the display of the premier character D can watch the progress of the variable production while having an uplifting feeling for the jackpot. However, a player who does not know what kind of character the premier character D is may lose interest without noticing that the jackpot is confirmed even if the premier character D is displayed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, along with the display of the premier character D, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order to notify that the jackpot has been determined. Along with this, it is decided to execute light emission control to make the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit light in rainbow colors so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit light in rainbow colors. This makes it easier for a player who does not know what kind of character the premier character D is to know that the jackpot is confirmed.

As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (C-1) and 14 (C-2), the premier cut-in is, for example, the face of the premier character D and the rainbow-colored "Ya-ta" character (hereinafter, the rainbow-colored character). A premier cut-in image 58 in which "rainbow characters") is superimposed on a horizontally elongated trapezoidal rainbow-colored effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 for 0.8 seconds.

For example, the rainbow characters displayed in the premier cut-in are relatively large (eg, the same size as the red characters for the strong cut-in), at least larger than the characters for the weak cut-in and the medium cut-in. Therefore, even if the display time is relatively short, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the characters.

In the present embodiment, the premier cut-in image 58 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the production image related to the battle just before any one of the characters A to C participates in the battle as an ally of the own character. (See FIG. 20 (D)). When the premier cut-in is executed, the premier character D does not appear during the battle (during SPSP reach 1), and one of the characters A to C appears instead.

Further, in the premier cut-in, for example, a production sound called "cuein" (hereinafter, referred to as "premier cut-in sound") for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed from the start of displaying the premier cut-in image 58 is emitted from the speaker 24. It is a production that outputs for 1.8 seconds. In the present embodiment, since the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is relatively short, a sound different from the character string indicated by the premier cut-in image 58 (that is, the rainbow character "Yata") is used as the premier cut-in sound. It is outputting.

The same sound as the character string shown by the premier cut-in image 58 may be output as the premier cut-in sound. Specifically, for example, from the start of displaying the premier cut-in image 58, the line of the premier character D "Yaita" may be output from the speaker 24 for 1.8 seconds.

As illustrated in FIG. 14 (C-2), during the premier cut-in, the board so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit rainbow colors for 2 seconds from the start of displaying the premier cut-in image 58. Light emission control is performed so that the lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit light in rainbow colors. Before and after the execution of the premier cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPSP reach 1.

In the present embodiment, the relationship of the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 <the output time of the premier cut-in sound <the iridescent emission time of the frame member 3 and the like is predetermined for the premier cut-in (FIG. 14 (FIG. 14). See D-2)). The rainbow image display start timing, the rainbow color emission start timing, and the premier cut-in sound output start timing are all at the premier cut-in start time. With such a configuration, for example, even if the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is relatively short (for example, 0.8 seconds), the output of the premier cut-in sound and the frame member even after the display of the premier cut-in image 58 is completed. Iridescent emission of 3rd magnitude continues. As a result, after the display of the premier cut-in image 58 is completed, the premier cut-in is executed by the combination of the cut-in sound and the rainbow-colored light emission (that is, it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed). Can be grasped. Other relationships between the display time of the premier cut-in image 58, the output time of the premier cut-in sound, and the rainbow-colored light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the cut-in effect, for example, the size of the cut-in image, the length of the output time of the cut-in sound, and the length of the light emission time of the frame member 3 or the like according to each characteristic color suggest high reliability. .. The size of each cut-in image is larger in the order of weak cut-in image 55 <medium cut-in image 56 <strong cut-in image 57 <premier cut-in image 58. The length of the light emitting time of the frame member 3 and the like is longer in the order of cut-in <medium cut-in <strong cut-in <premier cut-in. The output time of each cut-in sound is longer in the order of weak cut-in sound <medium cut-in sound <strong cut-in sound <premier cut-in sound. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to experience the high reliability by the synergistic effect of the information from the visual sense and the information from the auditory sense.

In the present embodiment, in the cut-in effect other than the premier cut-in, the display time of each cut-in image is longer in the order of weak cut-in image 55 <medium cut-in image 56 <strong cut-in image 57, and the display time of the cut-in image is long. The longer it is, the higher the reliability is set in advance. Here, since the premier character D is a character that does not participate in the battle and is not related to the battle, it may not be preferable to display it on the LCD screen 5 for a very long time (for example, 1.8 seconds) during the battle. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the premier cut-in is set in advance so that the display time of the cut-in image is shorter than that of the weak cut-in image 55 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, the relationship of the display time of the cut-in image is in the order of the premier cut-in image 58 <weak cut-in image 55 <medium cut-in image 56 <strong cut-in image 57.

The display time of each cut-in image may have any relationship, for example, even if the display time is longer in the order of weak cut-in image 55 <medium cut-in image 56 <strong cut-in image 57 <premier cut-in image 58. good.

Further, the size of the cut-in image related to each cut-in, the length of the output time of the cut-in sound, and the length of the light emission time of the frame member 3 or the like according to each characteristic color may have any relation. For example, it is not necessary to suggest high reliability by these, for example, the size of the cut-in image related to each cut-in, the output time of the cut-in sound, and the light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like are each cut-in. May be all the same. Further, the higher the reliability, the smaller each cut-in image may be, or the cut-in sound and the light emitting time of the frame member or the like may be shorter.

Further, another effect means capable of emitting light may be emitted in rainbow colors during the premier cut-in effect. For example, emission control is performed so that the effecting object 7 that is not operating during the premier cut-in effect looks like a rainbow color. You may.

Further, the position where the cut-in image related to each cut-in is displayed is not limited to the position where it does not overlap with the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 (specifically, the position exemplified in FIG. 14), but overlaps with the decorative symbol 501. It may be a position, a position that overlaps with the small symbol 502, or a position that overlaps with both the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. In such a case, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the cut-in image. As a result, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 can be visually recognized even while the cut-in image is being displayed. Further, the cut-in image may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. As a result, there is no possibility that the visibility of the cut-in image will be deteriorated by the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. Even in such a case, since the fourth symbol is variablely displayed on the front side of the other images including the cut-in image, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the fourth symbol. Further, the cut-in image may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 501, and the small symbol 502 may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the cut-in image. As a result, the cut-in image can be displayed without worrying about the display position of the decorative symbol 501, and it is possible to recognize that the small symbol 502 is being displayed in a variable manner by visually recognizing it.

When the reliability is equal to or higher than the predetermined reliability (for example, the reliability is 100%), the cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502, and the reliability is higher than the predetermined reliability. If it is low, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the cut-in image.

[Relationship between SPSP reach 1 and cut-in effect]
FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the relationship between the content of SPSP reach 1 and the mode of cut-in effect. As illustrated in FIG. 15A, in the present embodiment, when a cut-in effect other than the premier cut-in is executed, the characters displayed in the executed cut-in effect (specifically, characters A to characters). One of the characters in C) must participate in the battle between his character and the enemy.

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 15B, when the premier cut-in is executed as the cut-in effect, the premier character D displayed in the executed cut-in effect does not participate in the battle between the own character and the enemy. .. Instead, one of the characters A to C participates in the battle, and the character wins the enemy and becomes a big hit.

As described above, the cut-in effect may function as an effect suggesting a character appearing during a period other than the cut-in effect during the period during SPSP reach 1, and the above character may not suggest, but the jackpot is confirmed. It may function as a production that suggests that.

An example of the ratio of characters A to C appearing in SPSP Reach 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (C). For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 is selected by lottery using a random number for the effect control pattern (one of the random numbers for effect control) at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. Determine the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, when the variable effect pattern capable of executing SPSP reach 1 is determined, the type of the character participating in the battle between the own character and the enemy is uniquely determined.

Here, in the present embodiment, there are the following two types of variable effects in which the battle result is a victory, that is, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and the SPSP reach 1 can be executed.
-A "direct hit" pattern in which the character wins the enemy without executing the loss suggestion (see FIGS. 23 (G) and 23 (H)) that pretends that the character has been defeated by the enemy and the loss has been notified.
(FIG. 13 (f) → (g) → (i) (or (h)) → (j) → (k) → (l) → (m) → (n))
(Corresponding fluctuation pattern: A11, see FIG. 9 (D))
-A pattern of "revival hit" in which the effect display is executed as if the own character won the enemy and the jackpot was revived by executing the hit action effect and the victory effect through the loss suggestion.
(FIG. 13 (f) → (g) → (i) or (h) → (j) → (k) → (o) → (p) → (l) → (m) → (n))
(Corresponding fluctuation pattern: see A13, FIG. 9 (D))

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, 80% of the variable effect patterns corresponding to the variable effect for notifying the jackpot in SPSP reach 1 is the variable effect pattern related to the direct hit, and it is a revival. The ratio of the variable effect pattern is 20%.

The specific determination method will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, but it corresponds to the variable effect pattern in which any of the characters A to C participates in the battle among the variable effect patterns related to direct hits. Therefore, the mode of the cut-in effect is determined by the advance notice effect pattern determination process described later so that the premier cut-in can be executed at a rate of, for example, 2%. As illustrated in FIG. 15C, the proportion of the variable effect pattern in which the character A participates in the battle (that is, the variable effect pattern capable of executing a weak cut-in) is among the variable effect patterns related to the direct hit. For example, 21%. Further, the ratio of the variable effect pattern in which the character B participates in the battle (that is, the variable effect pattern in which the medium cut-in can be executed) occupies, for example, 30%, and the variable effect pattern in which the character C participates in the battle (that is, the strong cut-in). The ratio of the variable effect pattern) that can be executed is, for example, 47%.

Further, for example, among the variable production patterns related to the resurrection, the premier cut-in is executed at a rate of, for example, 1% corresponding to the variable production pattern in which any character from character A to character C participates in the battle. The mode of the cut-in effect is determined so as to be possible. Of the variable effect patterns related to the resurrection, the ratio of the variable effect pattern that can execute the weak cut-in is, for example, 60%, and the ratio of the variable effect pattern that can execute the medium cut-in is, for example, 24%. be. Further, the ratio of the variable effect pattern capable of executing the strong cut-in is, for example, 15%.

Further, the premier cut-in is not executed based on the variation effect pattern for loss in which the battle result is defeated (that is, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is loss and SPSP reach 1 can be executed). The rate at which the premier cut-in is viablely controlled is 0%. In addition, among such variation effect patterns for loss, the ratio of the variation effect pattern capable of executing a weak cut-in is, for example, 80%, and the ratio of the variation effect pattern capable of executing a medium cut-in is, for example, 15%. Is. Further, the ratio of the variable effect pattern in which the strong cut-in can be executed is, for example, 5%.

In this embodiment, the direct hit is easier to execute the premier cut-in than the resurrection hit. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of direct hit, the strong cut-in is easier to execute than the weak cut-in or the medium cut-in, and in the case of the resurrection hit, the weak cut-in is more easily executed than the medium cut-in or the strong cut-in. Is also easy to execute.

In the case of a direct hit, the premier cut-in may be controlled to be executable, while in the case of a resurrection hit, the execution of the premier cut-in may be suppressed. Further, the premier cut-in may be more easily executed in the case of a resurrection hit than in the case of a direct hit, and the execution probability of the premier cut-in may not differ depending on whether it is a direct hit or a resurrection hit. The ratio described with reference to FIG. 15C is only an example, and any ratio may be used.

It should be noted that the effect content of SPSP reach 1 and the mode of the cut-in effect may not be related. For example, as long as it is a variable effect pattern in which SPSP reach 1 can be executed, the mode of the cut-in effect may be determined by a random number lottery based on whether it is a big hit or not, regardless of the effect content. As an example, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the variation effect is the variation effect pattern in which the character A participates in the battle, a strong cut-in for displaying the character C may be executed during the battle.

[Example of button production]
FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a button effect executed at the end of SPSP reach 1. The button effect according to FIG. 13 (k) shows the player the effect button 26 by displaying the button images 51 exemplified in FIGS. 16 (A) to 16 (C) during SPSP reach 1 (during battle). It is a production that encourages operation, and is a preliminary production that allows the player to grasp the high and low reliability.

The button effect is when the end timing of the predetermined valid period (for example, when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the button effect) has arrived, or when the valid period ends in response to the operation of the effect button 26 during the valid period. It ends immediately.

As illustrated in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, three types of button effects, a weak button effect, a strong button effect, and a premier button effect, are prepared in advance. The reliability of these three types of button effects is different from each other. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of weak button effect <strong button effect <premier button effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 16A, the weak button effect includes, for example, a button image 51 imitating an effect button 26 in a normal state in which light emission is controlled to white that has not been operated, and a gauge image 52 showing an effective period. , "Press!" Is displayed near the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. These three types of effect images are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 from the start of the weak button effect, and continue to be displayed until the end of the valid period (see FIG. 16 (D)).

Further, the weak button effect is, for example, an effect of outputting the line of the own character (hereinafter, referred to as "operation instruction sound") of "press" from the speaker 24 for 1 second from the start of displaying the button image 51.

Further, in the weak button effect, as illustrated in FIG. 16D, the effect button 26 controlled to the normal state appears to emit white light from the start of display of the button image 51 to the end of the valid period. The light emission of the button lamp 262 is controlled. Further, from the start of the display of the button image 51 to the end of the valid period, the lamps other than the button lamps 262 (for example, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C) are turned off. This makes it possible to direct the player's attention to the effect button 26.

As illustrated in FIG. 16B, the strong button effect is, for example, a button image 51 imitating an effect button 26 in a protruding state whose light emission is controlled in red, a gauge image 52, and an operation instruction of "press!". This is an effect of displaying the characters of and near the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Similar to the weak button effect, these three types of effect images are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 from the start of the strong button effect, and continue to be displayed until the end of the valid period (see FIG. 16D).

Further, the strong button effect is, for example, an effect of outputting the line of the own character (that is, the operation instruction sound) of "press" from the speaker 24 for 1 second from the start of the display of the button image 51, as in the weak button effect.

Further, in the strong button effect, as illustrated in FIG. 16D, the effect button 26 controlled to be in the protruding state is emitted in red from the start of the display of the button image 51 to the end of the valid period. The light emission of the button lamp 262 is controlled. Further, from the start of the display of the button image 51 to the end of the valid period, the lamps other than the button lamps 262 (for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C) are turned off as in the weak button effect.

The premier button effect illustrated in FIG. 16C is an effect of notifying that the jackpot is confirmed in the present embodiment. The premier button effect is, for example, a button image 51 imitating a rainbow-colored projecting effect button 26, a gauge image 52, and a character of an operation instruction "press!" Near the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. It is a production to be displayed on. Further, in the premier button effect, a rainbow-colored effect image is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the button image 51, the gauge image, and the characters of the operation instruction. These four types of effect images are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 from the start of the premier button effect, and continue to be displayed until the end of the valid period.

Further, in the premier button effect, as illustrated in FIG. 16E, the effect button 26 controlled to be in a protruding state appears to emit light in rainbow colors from the start of display of the button image 51 to the end of the valid period. The button lamp 262 is controlled to emit light. Further, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit light so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit light in rainbow colors.

Further, unlike the weak button effect and the strong button effect, the premier button effect is an effect of outputting a "fixed sound" called "cue" from the speaker 24 for 0.5 seconds from the start of displaying the button image 51. The "determined sound" is, for example, an effect sound for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, and is an effect sound different from the operation instruction sound.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (F), the premier button effect is controlled to be executable only in the direct-hit variable effect, and is controlled to be infeasible in the revival-per variable effect. Therefore, immediately after the end of the premier button effect, the hit operation effect according to FIG. 13 (l) is always executed. As a result, from the start of the premier button effect to the hit operation effect, the display of the rainbow-colored effect image and the rainbow-colored emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamp 262 are performed. It can be performed. As a result, the continuity between the premier button effect and the hit motion effect becomes clear, and the synergistic effect of these two effects makes it possible to further enhance the player's uplifting feeling for the big hit.

In the present embodiment, during the premier button effect, the effector 7 operated by the hit operation effect immediately after the premier button effect is turned off without being controlled to emit light so as to appear rainbow-colored. As a result, it is possible to control the light emission of the effecting object 7 so that it looks like a rainbow at the start of the hitting motion effect, and to operate the effecting object 7, so that the impact of the hitting motion effect on the player can be increased. Is possible.

In the premier button effect of the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which characters of operation instructions different from those of the weak button effect and the strong button effect are displayed and a definite sound is output so as to increase the special feeling of the effect. As the premier button effect, the same operation instruction characters as the weak button effect and the strong button effect (characters of "press!" In this embodiment) may be displayed, or instead of the definite sound (or the definite sound). The operation instruction sound may be output from the speaker 24 for 1 second.

In the present embodiment, the effect sounds such as BGM and character lines are not output from the speaker 24 as much as possible (or at all) during the button effect, and basically the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are turned off. .. By setting such a state during the button effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the liquid crystal screen 5 and the effect button 26 during light emission.

In the present embodiment, regarding the premier button effect, when the player operates the premier button effect after 1 second has elapsed from the start of the premier button effect, or when the player does not operate the premier button effect, the output time of the fixed sound <button image 51 with a rainbow-colored effect image. Etc. is predetermined so that the relationship of the display time of the frame member 3 and the like = the rainbow-colored light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like is established (see FIG. 16 (E)). Due to such a relationship, the display of the button image 51 is continued or the frame member 3 and the like are continuously emitted in rainbow colors even after the output of the definite sound is completed. As a result, for example, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the game machine 1 by outputting a relatively short fixed sound, and then operate the effect button 26 while making the player recognize that the jackpot is confirmed. ..

Even if the light emission control related to the premier button effect is completed, the frame lamp 37 and the like will continue to emit light in rainbow colors due to the light emission control related to the hit operation effect. For this reason, considering even after the end of the premier button effect, if the player operates after 1 second from the start of the premier button effect or if the player does not operate, the output time of the fixed sound <with a rainbow-colored effect image. The relationship of the display time of the button image 51 or the like <the rainbow-colored light emission time of the frame member 3 or the like is established.

In the present embodiment, even when the player operates from the start of the button effect to the completion of the output of the operation instruction sound (or the confirmation sound), the output of the operation instruction sound (or the confirmation sound) is all. It continues until the sound output is completed. On the other hand, the effect image related to the button effect is immediately erased according to the operation, and the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 or the like related to the button effect is immediately terminated according to the operation. With such a configuration, the next effect can be started immediately according to the operation of the player, and the halfway situation that the operation instruction sound (or the confirmation sound) is output only halfway does not occur.

For example, when the player operates from the start of the premier button effect to 0.5 seconds, the display time of the button image 51 or the like with the rainbow-colored effect image = the rainbow color of the frame member 3 or the like related to the premier button effect. The relationship of light emission time <output time of fixed sound is established. Considering even after the end of the premier button effect, the relationship of the display time of the button image 51 or the like accompanied by the rainbow-colored effect image <the output time of the fixed sound <the rainbow-colored light emission time of the frame member 3 or the like is established.

With the above configuration, the flow from the premier button effect to the hit motion effect becomes smooth, and it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the flow of the effect is not smooth and the interest is lowered.

The other relationship between the display time of the button image 51, the output time of the fixed sound, and the rainbow-colored light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, which is a modified example of the cut-in effect. do.

An example of the execution ratio of the button effect will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (F). The specific determination method will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 has a button effect by random number lottery based on the variation effect pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. To determine the aspect of.

In the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, and the weak button effect is determined, for example, at a rate of 46%, corresponding to the direct hit variation effect pattern in which SPSP reach 1 can be executed. A strong button effect is determined at a rate of 52%, and a premier button effect is determined at a rate of, for example, 2%.

Further, in response to the fluctuation effect pattern per revival in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and SPSP reach 1 can be executed, for example, a weak button effect is determined at a rate of 70%, for example, 30%. It is determined to be a strong button effect at a rate, for example, a premier button effect is determined at a rate of 0% (that is, it is not determined to be a premier button effect).

Further, in response to the variable effect pattern in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost and SPSP reach 1 can be executed, for example, a weak button effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and a strong button effect is determined at a rate of, for example, 10%. It is determined to be a button effect, for example, it is determined to be a premier button effect at a rate of 0% (that is, it is not determined to be a premier button effect).

By determining the mode of the button effect at such a ratio, in the present embodiment, it is notified that the premier button effect is a direct hit.

In the case of a resurrection hit, the premier button effect may be controlled to be executable, or the possibility of a simple big hit regardless of whether it is a direct hit or a resurrection hit may be suggested by the mode of the button effect. Further, the ratio described with reference to FIG. 16F is only an example, and any ratio may be used.

During the button effect, the effect button 26 is operated by alternately switching and displaying the button image 51 and the image imitating the effect button 26 in the operated state (that is, the pressed state) at the same position. You may urge the player to operate a button during the valid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the decorative symbol 501 is hidden with the start of the button effect, but the decorative symbol 501 (specifically, the reach symbol) may be displayed during the button effect.

In this embodiment, a "button suggestion effect" that suggests that the button effect is started is executed (see FIG. 20F). The button suggestion effect is a preview effect executed immediately before the start of the button effect in order to emphasize the button effect, and is executed one second before the start timing of the button effect at the end of the battle (SPSP reach 1). In the button suggestion effect, for example, as the button suggestion effect is started, the effect image related to the battle representing the own character or the enemy is stopped and fades out to white. The white effect image displayed in this way is displayed behind the image related to the button effect from the start to the end of the button effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 501 is hidden with the start of the button suggestion effect, but the decorative symbol 501 (specifically, the reach symbol) may be displayed during the button suggestion effect.

[Lamp control example of variable effect that executes premier cut-in / premier button effect]
With reference to FIG. 17, an example of lamp control in a variable effect in which a premier cut-in is executed as a cut-in effect and a premier button effect is executed as a button effect will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of lamp control in a variable effect in which a jackpot is notified via a premier cut-in and a premier button effect.

FIG. 17 shows, among the flows exemplified in FIG. 13, FIGS. 13 (a), (b), (c), (d), (s), (v), (e), (f), (g). , (I), (j), (k), (l), (m), (n) show a specific example of a pattern that proceeds in this order. In this specific example, the description of the advance notice effect other than the premier cut-in and the premier button effect will be omitted.

The variation effect according to the specific examples of FIGS. 17A and 17B can be executed corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D) of the first special symbol. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 develops into SPSP reach 1 in which the character and the enemy fight through normal reach and SP reach at the start of variable effect, and the variation that notifies the jackpot at the end of SPSP reach 1. It is assumed that the production pattern has been decided. Further, it is assumed that the premier cut-in is executed as the cut-in effect and the premier button effect is executed as the button effect at the start of the variable effect. Note that FIG. 17A is a specific example in which the player does not operate the effect button 26 during the premier button effect. FIG. 17B differs from the example of FIG. 17A only in that the player operates the effect button 26 during the premier button effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 17A, for example, after the variation effect is started with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the reach is reached at a predetermined timing (for example, when 11 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation effect). It is established and normal reach is started. And it develops from normal reach to SP reach. During that time, the frame member 3 and the like do not emit light in rainbow colors because the light emission is controlled by the light emission corresponding to the variable effect related to these effects.

It develops from SP reach to SPSP reach 1 where your character and the enemy battle, and the premier cut-in is started during SPSP reach 1. From the start of SPSP reach 1 to the start of premier cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like do not emit light in rainbow colors because the light emission is controlled by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to SPPS reach 1.

In the present embodiment, when both the SPSP reach 1 and the premier cut-in are executed at the same time, the premier cut-in image is superimposed on the front side of the effect image related to the battle (SPSP reach 1) on the liquid crystal screen 5. Will be displayed (see FIGS. 20 (D) and 22 (D)). In the present embodiment, the rainbow-colored light emission control related to the premier cut-in is prioritized without the light emission control related to SPSP reach 1. Therefore, from the start of the premier cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 emit light so as to look like a rainbow. Since the rainbow-colored light emission control ends after the display of the premier cut-in image 58 (see FIG. 14 (D-1)) ends, a frame is displayed during the display of the production image related to the battle after the display of the premier cut-in image 58 ends. The member 3 and the like emit light in rainbow colors for 1.2 seconds (see FIGS. 17 (A) and 14 (D-2)).

From the end of the light emission control related to the premier cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like do not emit light in rainbow colors because the light emission is controlled by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPPS reach 1.

As illustrated in FIG. 17A, the button suggestion effect is started at the end of SPSP reach 1. In the present embodiment, from the start of the button suggestion effect to the start of the button effect, the light emission control for the button suggestion effect is prioritized over the light emission control of the variable light emission corresponding to the SPSP reach 1. For example, during the button suggestion effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit light so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to blink white at regular intervals. When the premier button effect is started following the button suggestion effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in rainbow colors.

When the operation timing of the effect button 26 is 2 seconds before the start of the premier button effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control time related to the premier button effect is less than 2 seconds (see FIG. 17B). If the operation timing is 2 seconds after the start of the premier button effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control time related to the premier button effect is 2 seconds, and the operation timing is 2 seconds after the start of the premier button effect. In the case of, the time for controlling the light emission in the rainbow color related to the premier button effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds. Further, when the effect button 26 is not operated during the premier button effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control time related to the premier button effect is 3 seconds (see FIGS. 17 (A) and 16 (E)). In this way, the time of rainbow-colored light emission control related to the premier button effect is variable, which is different from the premier cut-in in which the rainbow-colored light emission control time is fixed at 2 seconds (FIG. 14 (D-). 2)).

With the end of the rainbow-colored light emission control accompanying the start of the premier button effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control with the start of the hit motion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, since the hit operation effect is started immediately after the end of the premier button effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control related to these two effects is continuous. Therefore, the rainbow-colored light emission control started with the start of the premier button effect continues even after the end of the premier button effect, and the relationship of the execution time of the premier button effect <the rainbow-colored light emission time of the frame member 3 etc. It holds.

In this embodiment, the hit motion effect when there is no operation from the player based on the variation effect pattern at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (execution time in this case is 5 seconds: FIG. 17 (). A) 3 seconds before the start timing of) is set as the start timing of the valid period of 3 seconds. That is, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the button effect (that is, during the valid period), the hit motion effect is started with the arrival of 3 seconds from the start of the button effect (FIG. 17 (A)). reference). On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is operated during the valid period, the hit operation effect is started at the timing corresponding to this operation (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, the start timing of the hit operation effect is different depending on the operation timing during the valid period and the presence or absence of the operation during the valid period. In this embodiment, this deviation is absorbed by the execution time of the hit motion effect.

In the present embodiment, the hit motion effect sound is output from the speaker 24 at an output time corresponding to the execution time of the hit motion effect (see FIGS. 17A and 17B). The hit operation effect sound may be output from the speaker 24 for a fixed output time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the hit operation effect.

It should be noted that, depending on the period during which the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode immediately before the stop display (that is, the execution time of the success effect), the start timing of the hit operation effect that occurs depending on the presence or absence of an operation during the button effect. You may absorb the deviation of.

With the end of the rainbow-colored light emission control accompanying the start of the hit motion effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control with the start of the victory effect is executed. In the present embodiment, since the winning effect is started immediately after the end of the hit motion effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control related to these two effects is continuous. The rainbow-colored light emission control that accompanies the start of the victory effect is continued until the start of the re-variation effect. In the present embodiment, the winning notification is performed by matching the symbols with the start of the winning effect. From the start of the victory effect to the end of the victory effect, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper corner of the screen, while the intermediate decorative symbol 501B is displayed large in the center of the screen (see FIG. 21 (C)). Then, with the end of the victory effect, three decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line in the center of the screen (see FIG. 21 (D)).

As illustrated in FIG. 17A, when the revariation effect is started, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in white. As illustrated in FIGS. 17A and 17B, in the present embodiment, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in rainbow colors from the start of the premier button effect to the start of the revariation effect. Therefore, during these effects, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to continue to emit light in rainbow colors. On the other hand, the button lamp 262 emits light in rainbow colors from the start of the premier button effect to the end of the hit operation effect, and is turned off at the start of the victory effect. Therefore, the effect button 26 is more rainbow-colored than the game board 2 and the frame member 3. The light emission time is short.

When the success effect is started following the revariation effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in rainbow colors with the start of the success effect. Therefore, after the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the winning effect is completed, the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the successful effect is started. The rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the success effect is continued until the stopped-displayed decorative symbol 501 is erased. As the decorative symbol 501 is erased, the opening effect dedicated to the 6R probability variation is started to notify that the jackpot game related to the 6R probability variation has started (see FIGS. 21 (H) and 21 (I)). .. In the present embodiment, the rainbow-colored light emission control is executed according to the start of the opening effect dedicated to the 6R probability variation with the end of the rainbow-colored light emission control accompanying the start of the victory effect. In the rainbow-colored light emission control accompanying the start of the opening effect, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are rainbow-colored. For this reason, the rainbow-colored light emission control that was started with the start of the victory effect continues even after the start of the opening effect. After that, as the predetermined (for example, the 1st round) round game starts, the rainbow-colored light emission control between the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C ends. Along with this, light emission control with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) corresponding to the predetermined round game is started. After that, the effect of displaying the characters "Aim for V" on the liquid crystal screen 5 to encourage the V prize is started, and when the V prize is won, the effect image (for example, a rainbow-colored effect image) that notifies the V prize according to the V prize is started. The display of the letter "V" accompanied by "V") is started, and the V winning lamp (not shown), the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the starting port lamp 38 emit light in rainbow colors. This rainbow-colored emission continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the V prize has been won and that the player shifts to the probabilistic mode (that is, the probabilistic game state) immediately after the jackpot game ends.

When the failure effect is started following the revariation effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in blue with the start of the failure effect. The control of light emission in blue accompanying the start of the failure effect is continued until the decorative symbol 501 that is stopped and displayed is erased. As the decorative symbol 501 is erased, an opening effect (not shown) suggesting that the possibility of a jackpot related to 6R time reduction is relatively high will be started. With the start of this opening effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in blue.
In the case of a big hit game related to the 6R probability change, an effect of notifying that the big hit game related to the 6R probability change is being executed from the start of a predetermined (for example, the 3Rth) round game (for example, an effect of blinking various lamps in yellow). ) Is started. After that, the effect of prompting the V prize is started, and when the V prize is won, the display of the effect image notifying the V prize is started according to the V prize, and the V prize lamp (not shown) and the board lamps 25A and 25B are framed. The lamps 37A to C and the start port lamp 38 start emitting light in rainbow colors. This rainbow-colored emission continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds).

As illustrated in FIG. 17 (A), the premier cut-in, the premier button effect, the hit action effect, the win effect, the hit notification, and the success effect are performed during one variable effect (that is, once for the first special symbol). It is an effect that can be executed once for each (during variable display). On the other hand, the rainbow-colored light emission control between the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C can be executed a plurality of times during one variation effect. In the present embodiment, at the start of the premier cut-in, the premier button effect, the hit action effect, the win effect, the hit notification, and the success effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of each effect is executed. For the rainbow-colored light emission control related to these effects, different light emission patterns may be used, or the same light emission pattern may be used.

[Specific example of variable production that executes premier cut-in / premier button production]
A specific example of a variable effect in which a premier cut-in is executed as a cut-in effect and two weak button effects and one premier button effect are executed as a button effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. .. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in the case where the effect of notifying that the jackpot is confirmed is not executed from the start of the variable effect to the end of the normal reach. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example from the time of SP reach development to the development of winning notification or SPSP reach. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example until the button suggestion effect is executed via the premier cut-in after the development of SPSP reach 1 (until immediately before the start of the button effect during SPSP reach 1). FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example from the start of the premier button production to the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot is notified at the end of SPSP reach 1. In the examples of FIGS. 18 to 23, the notation of the numerical value indicating the number of reserved special symbol determinations is omitted for the purpose of making the drawings easier to see. In the examples of FIGS. 18 to 23, during the variable display of the special symbol, the blue character "2" indicating the special 1 hold number is always displayed directly above the small symbol 502, and the special 2 hold number is displayed directly above the special 1 hold number. It is assumed that the red character "0" is always displayed.

The variation effect according to the specific example of FIGS. 18 to 21 is the same as that of FIG. 17, among the flows illustrated in FIG. 13, FIGS. 13 (a), (b), (c), (d), (s), and. Specific examples of direct hit patterns that proceed in the order of (v), (e), (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), (n) Shows.

The variation effect according to the specific example of FIGS. 18 to 21 can be executed corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D) of the first special symbol, as in FIG. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 develops into SPSP reach 1 in which the character and the enemy F fight through normal reach and SP reach at the start of variable effect, and notifies a big hit at the end of SPSP reach 1. It is assumed that the variable effect pattern has been determined. In this specific example, it is assumed that it is predetermined to execute the button effect twice, the "mini character effect", the premier cut-in, and the premier button effect at the start of the variable effect. Further, since this variation effect pattern corresponds to the jackpot variation pattern A11, the "pseudo-continuous effect" is executed twice during the variation effect (see FIG. 9D).

The "mini character effect" is, for example, a notice effect that displays a character different from the characters active in the reach effect (for example, the own character and the enemy) and suggests the reliability of the jackpot. It is a production. There are the following four types of characters displayed in the mini character production.
-Small bird suggesting low reliability (see Figure 18 (A))
・ Dinosaurs suggesting high reliability (Fig. 19 (C))
-Premier character F (Fig. 20 (C)) and a big bird (Fig. 28 (B)) suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

The mode of the character displayed in the mini character effect is not limited to the above, and may be any. For example, the character suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be an extremely small bird or a character displayed only for a moment (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, the premier character F).

In the present embodiment, even if a character suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed by the mini character effect, the frame lamp 37 or the like is not emitted in rainbow colors to indicate the reliability of the mini character effect. Even if a character whose jackpot is not confirmed is displayed in the mini character effect, the frame lamp 37 or the like is not controlled to emit light in a manner suggesting the reliability of the mini character effect.

In this embodiment, a plurality of effects suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed are prepared, but the various lamps do not emit rainbow colors in all the effects, but the various lamps emit rainbow colors only in some of the effects. do. For example, in the mini character production, a character suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed. However, in the mini character effect, unlike the premier button effect, a definite sound suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is not output from the speaker 24, and the frame lamp 37 or the like is not emitted in rainbow colors. In this way, by making the production means used to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed different, the player feels a little uncomfortable and motivates the player to be interested in deeply knowing the game machine 1. It is possible. The method of suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is not limited to the method of suggesting only by displaying the effect image, but only the method of suggesting only by outputting the effect sound from the speaker 24 or the method of emitting various lamps in rainbow colors. There is also a method suggested by. It can also be realized by combining two methods of displaying the effect image, outputting the effect sound, and emitting light in rainbow colors.

The "pseudo-ream effect" (see FIG. 18) is an effect of restarting all the decorative symbols 501 (specifically, the left decorative symbol 501A, the middle decorative symbol 501B, and the right decorative symbol 501C) that are temporarily stopped and displayed. be. For example, when the decorative symbol 501 is restarted once by the pseudo-continuous effect, it seems that the decorative symbol 501 is variablely displayed twice during the one-time variable display of the special symbol. The variation display of the decorative symbol 501 performed by the Nth pseudo-ream effect (N-th restart) is referred to as the "pseudo-N + 1-th" variation display. For example, the variable display of the decorative symbol 501 performed by the first pseudo-continuous effect (first restart) is called the "pseudo-second" variable display, and the second pseudo-continuous effect (second restart). The variable display of the decorative symbol 501 performed by the above is called the "pseudo third station" variable display.

A specific example of the pseudo-ream effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 18, but for example, when the "pseudo-ream symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 501B on the effective line for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). , All decorative symbols 501 are restarted by the pseudo-continuous effect (see, for example, FIGS. 18C to 18E). The pseudo-ream symbol is a special symbol (decorative symbol that is not used during normal variable display) that suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream effect, and is a symbol that is not temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line of the small symbol 502. It should be noted that the small symbol 502 continues to be variablely displayed at high speed during the pseudo-continuous production.

The timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is before the reach is established, during the normal reach, and during the SP reach. For this reason, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the stop display of the special symbol, during the full rotation reach, or after the hit notification. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during the SPSP reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reliability is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed than when it is not executed (for example, the reliability is 0.1%). Further, it is preset so that the reliability becomes relatively high as the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during one variable display of the special symbol increases (up to 3 times). The number of pseudo-continuous effects is uniquely determined according to the variation pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 9D). For example, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the loss pattern H0, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed even once. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the loss variation pattern H6, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. Further, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the jackpot variation pattern A11, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice.

In the configuration of the present embodiment illustrated in FIG. 9D, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once (for example, the reliability is 3%), it may not develop into a reach effect having a reliability higher than the SP reach. .. Further, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice (for example, the reliability is 15%), the reach effect with a reliability higher than the SP reach is surely developed. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect is controlled so that it can be executed three times only at the time of a big hit, and when it is executed three times, it always develops into a full rotation reach (see FIG. 13 (w)).

In the pseudo-continuous production, an effect image of a color corresponding to the number of executions is displayed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted with the emission color corresponding to the number of executions. The color corresponding to the first pseudo-continuous production is green, the color corresponding to the second pseudo-continuous production is red, and the color corresponding to the third pseudo-continuous production is rainbow color. For example, along with the execution of the first pseudo-continuous effect, a green effect image is displayed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in green. Along with the execution of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the green effect image is erased and the red effect image is displayed. Along with this, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in red. Along with the execution of the third pseudo-continuous effect, the red effect image is erased and the rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. Along with this, the effectors 7 arranged at the initial positions, the board lamps 25A and 25B, and the frame lamps 37A to C are emitted in rainbow colors. In the present embodiment, the full rotation reach is started as a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the decorative symbol 501 is restarted by the execution of the third pseudo-continuous effect. The rainbow-colored effect image related to the third pseudo-continuous effect is erased at the start of full rotation reach. Then, another rainbow-colored effect image is displayed with the start of full rotation reach. The rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the third pseudo-continuous production ends at the start of full rotation reach, but following this rainbow-colored light emission control, the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of full-rotation reach is performed. It will be started. Therefore, the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the third pseudo-continuous production and the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the full rotation reach are always continuous. This makes it possible to have continuity between the third pseudo-continuous production and the full rotation reach.

It should be noted that, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds later) after the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the third pseudo-continuous production is completed, the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of full rotation reach is started. You may. For example, after the light emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the third pseudo-continuous production is completed, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are turned off, and then the rainbow color is used when the full rotation reach is started. Light emission control may be started. This may make it easier for the player to know that the third pseudo-continuous production is completed and the full rotation reach is started.

As illustrated in FIG. 18A, the variation effect starts with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 start the variation display. Specifically, the decorative symbols 501 are displayed in a variable manner in each of the three columns (left column, middle column, and right column) so that 1 symbol to 9 symbols scroll vertically from top to bottom at high speed. NS. Further, the small symbol 502 is also displayed in a variable manner in each of the three columns (left column, middle column, and right column) so that 1 symbol to 9 symbols scroll vertically from top to bottom at high speed. In this embodiment, the small symbol 502 is variablely displayed in a variable display mode basically similar to that of the decorative symbol 501 (that is, a variable display mode that scrolls from top to bottom at the same speed as the decorative symbol 501). In the example shown in FIG. 18A, a small bird indicating low reliability is displayed by executing the mini character effect at the start of the variable effect.

The decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 may be variablely displayed in different directions. For example, the decorative symbol 501 is variablely displayed so as to scroll horizontally from right to left, while the small symbol 502 is on the top. It may be displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll vertically from to the bottom.

In the present embodiment, unless otherwise specified, during the variation effect, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light by the emission corresponding to the variation effect, so that the light is not emitted in rainbow colors. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button 26 (specifically, the button lamp 262) is turned off with the light emission suppressed during the period other than the button effect and the hit operation effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 18B, the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol, reach is established, and normal reach is started. In the present embodiment, the odd-numbered symbol alignment in which the same three odd-numbered symbols are aligned means a probability variation hit, whereas the even-numbered symbol alignment in which the same three even-numbered symbols are aligned is likely to be a time-saving hit (FIG. 9 (B)). reference). Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 18B, if the reach symbol is an even number, it is suggested that if it is a big hit, it is highly likely that it is a time saving hit. On the other hand, if the reach symbol is an odd number, it is suggested that the type of jackpot is a probability variation hit if it is a jackpot.

After that, the button effect is started during the normal reach (see FIG. 18B). This button effect is a weak button effect described with reference to FIG. 16 (A). Along with the start of the weak button effect, the button image 51, the gauge image 52, and the characters of the operation instruction, which imitate the effect button 26 in the normal state, are displayed. When these images are erased in response to an operation during the weak button effect, a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line of the decorative symbol 501 as the intermediate decorative symbol 501B (see FIG. 18C). Then, the pseudo-ream effect is executed, and the pseudo-second variable display for restarting the decorative symbol 501 at high speed is started (see FIG. 18 (D)).

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that can be executed regardless of whether or not the button effect is executed. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the weak button effect as an execution trigger, the reliability is higher than that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed without the button effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the strong button effect as the execution trigger, it is confirmed that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more. That is, the button effect is used as a chance to increase the reliability of the pseudo-continuous effect. It should be noted that a button effect different from the button effect executed at the end of SPSP reach 1 may be executed. For example, a button effect in an effect mode in which the characters of the operation instruction are not displayed may be executed. Further, it is not always necessary to execute the pseudo-continuous effect following the button effect, and another notice effect may be executed. For example, depending on the operation during the button effect, a notice effect suggesting that the reliability is high may be executed by a large number of characters crossing the screen.

As illustrated in FIG. 18D, the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect (number of restarts) is the character displayed at the start of the pseudo-ream effect (for example, the pseudo-second station (that is, the first time). It is notified by the green character (green character "x2") indicating that it is a restart of. Further, with the start of the pseudo second station, a green effect image is displayed along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are green for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Light emission is controlled. For example, the green effect image is continuously displayed even after the emission control in green is completed. In the example of FIG. 18, since the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the pseudo-second variation display, the green effect image is displayed until the pseudo-third-unit variation display starts. After the emission control in green is completed, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C resume the emission corresponding to the normal reach.

In addition, after the reach is established in the pseudo second variation display, it may develop into the SP reach (see FIG. 9 (D)). In this case, after the reach is established, the scroll speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B becomes slower, and the SP reach is developed through the “transition effect”. The “transitional effect” is an effect indicating that the reach effect is developed (see FIG. 19 (A)). In such a case, the green effect image is erased with the start of the transition effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 18E, the button effect is started after the reach is established in the pseudo-second variation display (see FIG. 18E). This button effect is a weak button effect like the first button effect. When the button effect is completed in response to the operation during the weak button effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-second variable display as in the case where the first pseudo-ream effect is executed (FIG. 18 (F). )reference). As a result, the second pseudo-series effect is executed and the pseudo-third-series variable display is started (see FIG. 18 (G)). For example, with the start of the pseudo-third station, the green effect image is erased, the red character "x3" indicating the number of times the pseudo-ream effect is executed, and the red effect image along the inside of the screen peripheral edge. Is displayed. At the same time, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are red and light emission controlled for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, with the start of the pseudo-third consecutive variation display, the effector 7 that emits red light returns to the initial position after operating for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). It should be noted that the effect 7 that emits green light may be operated in the same manner with the start of the pseudo-second variation display. The red effect image is continuously displayed even after the light emission control in red is completed. In the example of FIG. 18, since the transition effect is executed, the red effect image is displayed until the start of the transition effect. After the light emission control in red is completed, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C resume the light emission corresponding to the normal reach.

As illustrated in FIG. 18H, when the reach is established in the pseudo-third consecutive variation display and the scroll speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 501B becomes slower, the player can recognize that it is the final stage of the normal reach. (See FIG. 18 (I)). In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, it develops into the SP reach exemplified in FIG. 19 (B) or the SPSP reach exemplified in FIG. 20 (A), for example, through a transition effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 19A, the red effect image is erased with the start of the transition effect. In the transition effect, for example, the medium decorative symbol 501B, which has been scrolling slowly, is scrolled at high speed. Along with this, for example, the left decorative symbol 501A constituting the reach symbol moves diagonally upward to the left and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the left corner of the screen, and the right decorative symbol 501C constituting the reach symbol is reduced diagonally upward to the right. While moving, a temporary stop display is displayed at the right corner of the screen.

As illustrated in FIG. 19B, when the SP reach is developed, the title image 503 indicating the title of the SP reach, "If you can find the character E, a big hit ?!" is displayed, and then the own character in the SP reach is displayed. The subtitle image 504 representing the lines of the above is displayed (see FIG. 19C). These images are production images that suggest high or low reliability depending on the color of the characters. In the present embodiment, since the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect along with the display of these images, the light is not emitted in rainbow colors.

The player can watch the progress of the production while estimating the reliability from the colors of the title image 503 and the subtitle image 504, the target character searched by the character is the character E (see FIG. 19B), and the like. Is. In the example of FIG. 19C, a dinosaur suggesting high reliability is displayed by executing a mini character effect during SP reach.

In the case of a variation effect corresponding to another jackpot variation pattern A3 different from the jackpot variation pattern A11 corresponding to the current variation effect (see FIG. 9 (D)), SP as illustrated in FIG. 19 (H). At the end of the reach, the own character discovers the target character E, the hit motion effect shown in FIG. 13 (l) is executed, and the hit notification is performed (FIGS. 19 (I) and 19 (J)). Even when the jackpot is notified in the SP reach, the flow of the effect after the hit operation effect is the same as in the case where the jackpot is notified in the SPSP reach 1.

Here, in the present embodiment, the premier cut-in and the premier button effects are the effects executed by SPSP reach 1. For this reason, in the variable effect that ends without developing from SP reach to SPSP reach 1, the premier cut-in and premier button effects cannot be executed, and even if it is a big hit, the board lamps 25A and 25B are used only after the hit operation effect. The frame lamps 37A to C are rainbow-colored and the light emission is not controlled. In such a variable effect, there is less chance that the frame lamp 37 or the like emits light in rainbow color as compared with the variable effect that executes the premier cut-in and the premier button effect, and the frame lamp 37 or the like is rainbow-colored before the hit operation effect. The continuity obtained by emitting light multiple times cannot be obtained. Further, when the notice effect is executed at a plurality of timings (for example, the pseudo-ream effect related to the pseudo second station and the pseudo-sequential effect related to the pseudo third station (see FIG. 18)), the light emission control corresponding to each notice effect is performed. As a result, the entire gaming machine emits light in different colors, which may complicate the production, and there is a possibility that the preliminary productions cannot be related to each other.

On the other hand, for example, in the variable effect in which the premier cut-in and the premier button effect are executed, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit rainbow colors even before the hit operation effect. The frame lamp 37 and the like can be made to emit light multiple times in rainbow colors even before the hit operation effect. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of unity as a whole of the variable effect by giving the different notice effects to each other with relevance and continuity.

If the character E cannot find the target character E at the end of the SP reach, as illustrated in FIGS. 19 (D) and 19 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 501B temporarily stops and the reach loss eye is temporarily stopped and lost. Notification is performed. Since this variation effect corresponds to the jackpot variation pattern A11, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 will not be stopped and displayed by this loss notification, and will develop into SPSP reach 1 through the transition effect ( See FIG. 19 (F)).

In the case of a variation effect corresponding to another variation pattern, after the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed in the same manner without changing the combination of the decorative symbols 501. Loss notification may be performed (see Fluctuation Pattern H3 for Loss, FIG. 19 (G)). Further, after the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may develop into SPSP reach 2 through a transition effect (see jackpot variation pattern A10 or A12, loss variation pattern H10 or H11, and FIG. 19 (F)). .. In addition, for example, there may be a pattern of a revival in which a hit operation effect and a hit notification (see FIGS. 19 (I) and 19 (J)) are performed after the loss notification at the end of the SP reach.

As illustrated in FIG. 20A, the variable effect this time develops into SPSP reach 1 in which the character and the enemy F fight through a transition effect (or the same transition effect) different from the above.

In this embodiment, unlike the transition effect that develops into SP reach (see FIG. 19A), the screen configuration is as follows in order to emphasize SPSP reach 1 during the transition effect that develops into SPSP reach. Will be changed to. Specifically, for example, the hold icon 54 and the hold stage 540 that have been displayed before the start of SPSP reach 1 (for example, at the start of variable effect: see FIG. 18A) are hidden at the start of the battle (for example, FIG. 20 (A)). These effect images are displayed again immediately before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, 2 seconds before) (see FIG. 12A).

Further, in the present embodiment, the reach symbol is basically temporarily stopped at the upper part of the screen during the battle (during SPSP reach 1) except for the period when the button effect (see FIG. 13 (k)) described later is executed. Continues to be (see FIGS. 20 (A)-(E)).

After shifting to the own character advantageous route by the push-and-push effect illustrated in FIG. 20 (B), the advance notice effect of notifying the jackpot is executed for the first time in this variable effect (see FIG. 20 (C)). Specifically, as a mini character effect, the premier character F, which suggests that the jackpot is confirmed, is displayed as a part of the background image during the battle. In the present embodiment, even if the premier character F is displayed in the mini character effect, the light emission control in the variable light emission corresponding to the SPSP reach 1 is continued, so that the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are big hits along with the display. The emission is not controlled by the rainbow color, which suggests that it is definite. This makes it possible to inconspicuously suggest that the jackpot is confirmed during the battle without distracting the player. However, a player who does not know what kind of character is unaware that the jackpot is confirmed. This makes it possible to suggest that the jackpot is implicitly confirmed only for some players.

As illustrated in FIG. 20 (D), the premier cut-in is executed as a preliminary announcement effect for notifying the second big hit in this variable effect. In the premier cut-in, the premier cut-in sound is output from the speaker 24 when the display of the premier cut-in image 58 including the rainbow color is started, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit light in rainbow colors. Be controlled. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot is confirmed as compared with the case where the mini character effect for displaying the premier character F is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 20 (E), after the premier cut-in is completed, the frame member 3 and the like are again controlled to emit light by the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPPS reach 1, so that the light is not emitted in rainbow colors.

After that, the button suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 20F). In the button suggestion effect, the LCD screen 5 fades out to white. Further, in the button suggestion effect, for example, a white effect image suggesting that the button image 51 is displayed is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image related to SPSP reach 1 indicating that the battle is in progress. .. This effect image is composed of, for example, a white effect image representing a frame portion of the button image 51 and a white effect image representing an arc-shaped light locus. The display of the effect image suggests, for example, the position where the button image 51 is displayed and the shape of the displayed button image 51 (and the shape of the effect button 26).

In this embodiment, in order to emphasize the button effect, the screen configuration is changed as follows at the start of the button suggestion effect. For example, the left decorative symbol 501A (reach symbol) displayed in the upper left corner of the screen and the right decorative symbol 501C (reach symbol) displayed in the upper right corner of the screen are hidden, and the icon 53 is hidden. NS. The reach symbol is displayed again with the start of the victory effect (see FIG. 21C) described later. Further, the icon 53 is displayed again immediately before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, 2 seconds before) (see FIG. 12A). Then, the icon 53 is erased along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501 (see FIG. 12B).

In the present embodiment, the light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C is performed so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to blink white at regular intervals from the start of the button suggestion effect. .. In the button suggestion effect, a white effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and light emission control of the various lamps is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear white. This allows the player to recognize that the button effect will start soon.

As a button suggestion effect for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C may be blinked in rainbow colors at regular intervals from the start of the button suggestion effect.

When the premier button effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (A) is started following the button suggestion effect illustrated in FIG. 20 (F), the display of the button image 51 or the like accompanied by the rainbow-colored effect image is started and confirmed. Sound is output. Along with this, the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the effect button 26 (button lamp 262) are controlled to emit rainbow colors by the light emission pattern for the premier button effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot is confirmed even before the effect button 26 is operated.

In response to the operation of the effect button 26 during the premier button effect (or in response to the arrival of the end timing of the predetermined valid period), the hit operation effect is started. As a result, the rainbow-colored effect image and the like related to the premier button effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (A) are erased, and the rainbow-colored effect image related to the hit motion effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (B) (in the present embodiment). An image that colors the surroundings of the effect 7) is displayed. Further, from the start of the hit motion effect, the hit motion effect sound is output from the speaker 24, and following the rainbow-colored light emission control from the start of the premier button effect, the board lamp 25A and the board lamp 25A and the light emission pattern for the hit motion effect are used. The 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the effect button 26 are controlled to emit rainbow colors. In addition to this, in the hit motion effect, the effect object 7 is operated in the lower left direction while being controlled to emit light in rainbow colors.

When the winning effect illustrated in FIG. 21C is started, the rainbow-colored light emission control for the effect button 26 (button lamp 262) and the effect accessory 7 ends, while the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame. The iridescent light emission control with respect to the lamps 37A to C is continued. In addition, the rainbow-colored effect image related to the hit motion effect is erased, and from the start of the victory effect, an effect image is displayed in which the character defeats the enemy and notifies the victory, and the medium decorative symbol 501B is a reach symbol. Temporary stop display is performed with the same 4 symbols, and a hit notification is performed by matching even-numbered symbols. Further, with the temporary stop of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 scrolling at high speed is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 501 in the form of four symbols. After that, even if the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line in the center of the screen as illustrated in FIG. 21 (D), the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are rainbow-colored following the victory effect. Light emission is controlled.

When the re-variation effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (E) is started, the decorative symbols 501 slowly start the variation display again while being synchronized in the mode of symbol alignment, and the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are displayed. The rainbow-colored light emission control according to the above is completed, and the white light-emitting control is started.

When the success effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (F) is executed, for example, the decorative symbols 501 and the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed after the seven symbols are aligned (see FIG. 21 (G)). From the start of the successful production, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit rainbow colors. After that, as illustrated in FIGS. 21 (H) and 21 (I), the jackpot game related to the 6R probability change is performed while the rainbow-colored light emission control for the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C is continued. The display of the effect image related to the opening effect notifying the start and the effect image prompting right-handed (for example, the characters ">> right-handed") is started.

By executing the flow of the effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (I) during the variation effect, the effect image (character image of "RUSH BONUS") illustrated in FIG. 21 (I) is changed in the first special symbol. It may be displayed during display. For example, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are not stopped and displayed at the timing illustrated in FIG. 21 (G), but are temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, for example, the decorative symbol 501 is hidden without being stopped and displayed while the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the seven symbols aligned, and the display of the effect image illustrated in FIG. 21 (H) is started. Then, along with the display of the effect image illustrated in FIG. 21 (I), the small symbols 502 are stopped and displayed with 7 symbols aligned. As a result, the type of jackpot can be notified using most of the area of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the mode of the symbol alignment that is finally stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol is the small symbol 502. Can be indicated by.

Further, the timing for temporarily stopping and displaying the small symbol 502 in the manner of aligning the symbols is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, and may be any timing. For example, the small symbol 502 is continuously displayed in a variable manner at high speed from the start of the variable effect, and the timings at the start of the winning motion effect, the start of the winning effect, and immediately before the stop display of the special symbol (for example, at the start or the end of the successful effect). ) May be displayed temporarily from any timing in the manner of matching the symbols. This makes it possible to control the small symbol 502 according to the mode of the decorative symbol 501, the situation of the variable effect including the reach effect, the light emitting mode of the panel lamp 25, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 37, and the like, and the width of the effect can be increased. It can be expanded.

[Specific example of variable production without executing premier cut-in / premier button production]
With reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, at the start of the variable effect, it is determined to execute a cut-in effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, strong cut-in), and the button effect is other than the premier button effect (for example, strong button). A specific example of the variable effect when the execution is decided will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example until the button suggestion effect is executed via the strong cut-in after the development of SPSP reach 1 (until immediately before the start of the button effect during SPSP reach 1). FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example from the start of the strong button effect during the SPSP reach 1 to the notification of the winning at the end of the SPSP reach 1.

The variation effect according to the specific examples of FIGS. 22 and 23 is different from FIGS. 20 and 21 which are specific examples of one of the flows illustrated in FIG. 13, and the specific examples of the three flows illustrated in FIG. Including an example. Specifically, as in FIGS. 20 and 21, the process proceeds in the order of FIGS. 13 (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), (n). Specific examples of direct hit patterns and revival in the order of FIGS. 13 (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (o), (l), (m), (n) A specific example of the hit pattern and a specific example of the loss pattern in the order of FIGS. 13 (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (o), and (p) are shown. .. Until the start of SPSP reach 1 (FIGS. 13 (e) and 13 (f)), FIGS. 13 (a), (b), (c) and (d) are the same as the specific examples of FIGS. 17 to 21. , (S), (v), it is assumed that the variable effect proceeds in this order.

The variation effect related to the direct hit pattern can be executed corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D) of the first special symbol, as in FIGS. 17, 20, and 21. Further, the variation effect related to the revival hit pattern can be executed corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A13 of the first special symbol, and the variation effect related to the loss pattern can be executed corresponding to the loss pattern H11 of the first special symbol. (See FIG. 9 (D)).

For example, if the flow of the variable effect illustrated in FIGS. 18 (A) to 18 (I) and 19 (A) to 19 (F) is followed by the SPSP reach 1 exemplified in FIG. 22 (A), the jackpot is confirmed. Since the notice effect has not been executed even once, the player does not know whether it is a big hit or not. Under such circumstances, after the same pushing effect as that shown in FIG. 20 (B) is executed, the mini character effect in which the premier character F is displayed is not executed unlike FIG. 20 (C). The battle progresses (see FIGS. 22B and 22C).

When the strong cut-in according to FIG. 22D is started, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit red light with the start of the display of the strong cut-in image 57. The player can recognize that the reliability is relatively high, but does not know whether it is a big hit or not.

As illustrated in FIG. 22 (E), after the end of the strong cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like are again controlled to emit light by a color other than the rainbow color in the light emission corresponding to the variation effect according to the SPSP reach 1. Then, after the same button suggestion effect as in FIG. 20 (F) is started (see FIG. 22 (F)), the strong button effect illustrated in FIG. 23 (A) is started. From the start of the strong button effect, the button image 51 and the like without the rainbow-colored effect image are displayed, and the operation instruction sound is output from the speaker 24. Along with this, the effect button 26 (button lamp 262) is controlled to emit red light by the light emission pattern for the strong button effect, and the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are turned off.

In the direct hit pattern, the jackpot is notified in the same flow as in FIGS. 21 (B) to 21 (F) (see FIGS. 23 (B) to (F)). In the revival hit pattern, the loss suggestion exemplified in FIG. 23 (G) is executed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C blink in blue. Following this, the intermediate decorative symbol 501B is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the reach symbol, and the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eye (FIG. 23 (H)). Along with this, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are turned off. However, in this loss notification, the hit operation effect illustrated in FIG. 23 (B) is executed without the decorative symbol 501 being stopped and displayed. After the hit operation effect, the big hit is notified in the same flow as in FIGS. 21 (B) to 21 (F).

Further, in the loss pattern, following the loss suggestion, the loss notification is performed by the reach loss eye (FIG. 23 (G) → (H)). Then, the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed without changing in the same manner, and the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed accordingly (see FIGS. 23 (G) to 23 (I)). Along with this, the icon 53 is erased, and the frame lamps 37A to C emit white light.

As described above, in the variable effect in which the premier cut-in and the premier button effect are not executed as illustrated in FIGS. 22 and 23, even if it is a big hit, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to only after the hit operation effect are used. C is rainbow-colored and light emission is not controlled. In such a variable effect, there is less chance that the various lamps emit light in rainbow colors compared to the variable effect that executes the premier cut-in and the premier button effect, and the various lamps are rainbow-colored multiple times before the hit operation effect. The continuity obtained by emitting light cannot be obtained. In addition, since the player cannot recognize that it is a big hit, it may be difficult for the player to have an expectation for the big hit for the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the variable effect in which the premier cut-in and the premier button effect as illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21 are executed, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are rainbow-colored and light emission control is performed multiple times. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the entire variable effect, and it is possible to realize an effect that makes it easy for the player to grasp that it is a big hit.

[Transformation example of premier cut-in production]
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the premier cut-in. The display time of the premier cut-in image 58, the output time of the premier cut-in sound, and the time of controlling light emission in rainbow colors of the frame member 3 or the like accompanying the start of the premier cut-in may have the following relationship.

In the following description with respect to FIG. 24, the premier cut-in image 58 is referred to as a “rainbow image”, the premier cut-in sound is referred to as “sound”, and light emission control in rainbow colors such as the frame member 3 accompanying the start of the premier cut-in is performed. It may be called "rainbow emission" respectively.

FIG. 24 (A-1): Rainbow image display time = Rainbow emission time <Sound output time / Rainbow image display start timing, rainbow emission start timing, and sound output start timing are all at the start of the premier cut-in.
-The rainbow image display end timing and the rainbow emission end timing are simultaneous, and the sound output end timing arrives after that (for example, after 1 second).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (A-1), for example, even if the rainbow image display time and the rainbow emission time end in a relatively short time (for example, 0.8 seconds), the sound output time continues thereafter. .. As a result, the premier cut-in is executed by recognizing that the premier cut-in sound is output even after the rainbow image display time and the rainbow emission time are over (that is, the jackpot is confirmed). Can be grasped by the player.

FIG. 24 (A-2): Rainbow emission time <Rainbow image display time <Sound output time / Rainbow image display start timing, rainbow emission start timing, and sound output start timing are all at the start of the premier cut-in.
-The rainbow image display end timing arrives after the rainbow emission end timing arrives (for example, less than 0.8 seconds), and then the sound output end timing arrives after that (for example, 1 second later).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (A-2), for example, by setting the rainbow emission time relatively short in advance (for example, less than 0.8 seconds from the start of the premier cut-in), immediately after the start of the premier cut-in. , It is possible to terminate the rainbow emission control related to the premier cut-in. Therefore, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit rainbow colors at the start of the premier cut-in, and immediately after that, another effect image displayed together with the rainbow image on the liquid crystal screen 5 (for example, in the example of FIG. 20D). It is possible to control the light emission with the light emission corresponding to the variable effect corresponding to the effect image related to the battle). Even with such a configuration, if the configuration is exemplified in FIG. 24 (A-2), the rainbow image display time and the sound output time continue even after the rainbow emission time ends. This makes it possible for the player to know that the premier cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premier cut-in image 58 or the premier cut-in sound even after the rainbow emission time has ended.

FIG. 24 (B-1): Rainbow emission time <Rainbow image display time <Sound output time / Rainbow image display start timing and sound output start timing are at the start of premier cut-in. The rainbow emission start timing arrives after the rainbow image display start timing (for example, 0.3 seconds later).
-The rainbow image display end timing and the rainbow emission end timing are simultaneous, and the sound output end timing arrives after that (for example, after 1 second).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (B-1), for example, the rainbow emission start timing is set after the player notices that the premier cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premier cut-in image 58 and the premier cut-in sound. It is possible to make it arrive. By setting the rainbow emission time relatively short in advance (for example, 0.5 seconds), the rainbow emission control related to the premier cut-in can be immediately terminated, and the emission control in the emission corresponding to the variable effect can be resumed. Even with such a configuration, if the relationship is as illustrated in FIG. 24 (A-2), the sound output time continues even after the rainbow emission time ends, so the jackpot can be confirmed with the afterglow of the premier cut-in. Other effects (eg, continuation of SPSP Reach 1) can be performed while suggesting that there is.

FIG. 24 (B-2): Rainbow image display time <Sound output time <Rainbow emission time / Rainbow image display start timing and sound output start timing are at the start of premier cut-in. The rainbow emission start timing arrives after the rainbow image display start timing (for example, less than 0.8 seconds).
-The sound output end timing arrives after the rainbow image display end timing arrives (for example, 1 second later), and the rainbow emission end timing arrives after that (for example, less than 1 second).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (B-2), for example, the rainbow emission start timing is set after the player notices that the premier cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premier cut-in image 58 and the premier cut-in sound. It is possible to make it arrive. Since the rainbow emission time continues even after the end of the rainbow image display time and the sound output time, for example, even if an effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, continuation of SPSP reach 1) is executed using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the like, the premiere is performed. It is possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed by leaving the afterglow of the cut-in.

FIG. 24 (B-3): rainbow emission time <rainbow image display time = sound output time ・ The rainbow image display start timing and sound output start timing are at the start of the premier cut-in. The rainbow emission start timing arrives after the rainbow image display start timing (for example, less than 0.5 seconds).
-After the arrival of the rainbow emission end timing (for example, less than 0.5 seconds), the rainbow image display end timing and the sound output end timing arrive at the same time.

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (B-3), for example, the rainbow emission start timing is set after the player notices that the premier cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premier cut-in image 58 and the premier cut-in sound. It is possible to make it arrive. By setting the rainbow emission time relatively short in advance (for example, 0.5 seconds), the rainbow emission control related to the premier cut-in can be immediately terminated, and the emission control in the emission corresponding to the variable effect can be resumed.

FIG. 24 (C-1): Rainbow image display time <Sound output time <Rainbow emission time / Rainbow emission start timing is at the start of premier cut-in. After the rainbow emission start timing (for example, 1.2 seconds later), the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing arrive at the same time.
-The sound output end timing arrives after the rainbow emission end timing and the rainbow image display end timing arrive at the same time (for example, 1 second).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (C-1), for example, the premier cut-in image 58 is displayed after recognizing that the jackpot is confirmed by rainbow light emission and that some effect for notifying the jackpot confirmation is started. It is possible to output the premier cut-in sound together with. Since the output of the premier cut-in sound continues even after the rainbow image display time and the sound output time are over, for example, an effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, continuation of SPSP reach 1) is executed using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the like. However, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed by leaving the afterglow of the premier cut-in.

FIG. 24 (C-2): Rainbow image display time <Sound output time <Rainbow emission time / Rainbow emission start timing is at the start of premier cut-in. After the rainbow emission start timing (for example, 0.1 seconds later), the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing arrive at the same time.
-The sound output end timing arrives after the rainbow image display end timing arrives (for example, 1 second later), and the rainbow emission end timing arrives after that (for example, less than 0.1 seconds).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (C-2), for example, the premier cut-in image 58 is displayed after recognizing that the jackpot is confirmed by rainbow light emission and that some effect for notifying the jackpot confirmation is started. It is possible to output the premier cut-in sound together with. Since the rainbow emission time continues even after the end of the rainbow image display time and the sound output time, for example, even if an effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, continuation of SPSP reach 1) is executed using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the like, the premiere is performed. It is possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed by leaving the afterglow of the cut-in.

FIG. 24 (C-3): rainbow image display time = rainbow emission time <sound output time / rainbow emission start timing is at the start of premier cut-in. After the rainbow emission start timing (for example, 0.8 seconds later), the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing arrive at the same time.
-The rainbow image display end timing arrives after the rainbow emission end timing arrives (for example, 0.8 seconds later), and the sound output end timing arrives after that (for example, 1 second later).

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (C-3), for example, the premier cut-in image 58 is displayed after recognizing that the jackpot is confirmed by rainbow light emission and that some effect for notifying the jackpot confirmation is started. It is possible to output the premier cut-in sound together with. For example, from the start of display of the premier cut-in image 58, the light emission corresponding to the variable effect corresponding to another effect image displayed together with the premier cut-in image 58 (for example, the effect image related to the battle in the example of FIG. 20D). Since the light emission control of the above can be resumed, the premier cut-in image 58 can be displayed while suppressing the decrease in the interest of the effect related to the above other effect images (for example, SPSP reach 1 in the example of FIG. 20 (D)). It is possible.

In all the configurations illustrated in FIG. 24, the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing are at the same time. However, for example, the sound output start timing may be reached after the rainbow image display start timing is reached, or the rainbow image may be started. The sound output start timing may arrive before the display start timing arrives.

The sound output time of the premier cut-in sound is not limited to 1.8 seconds and may be any number of seconds. For example, the sound output time of the premier cut-in sound may be shorter (or longer) than the display time of the premier cut-in image 58, or may be shorter (or longer) than the rainbow emission time of the frame member 3 or the like. ..

For example, in the premier cut-in, sound output time <rainbow image display time <rainbow emission time relationship, sound output time <rainbow image display time = rainbow emission time relationship, or sound output time <rainbow emission time <rainbow image display The case where the time relationship is established will be described below.
For example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing and the sound output end timing is earlier than the rainbow image display start timing and the rainbow emission start timing (for example, 1 second before), the output of the premier cut-in sound attracts the player's attention. , It is possible to display the premier cut-in image 58 and start rainbow emission.
Further, for example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing is earlier than the rainbow image display start timing and the rainbow emission start timing, and the sound output end timing is during the rainbow image display and the rainbow emission, the premier cut-in sound is output. It is possible to display the premier cut-in image 58 and start rainbow emission from the time when the player's attention is drawn, and it is possible to smooth the flow of the production.
Further, for example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing is at the same time as the rainbow image display start timing and the rainbow emission start timing, and the sound output end timing is during the rainbow image display and the rainbow emission, it is powerful at the start of the premier cut-in. It is possible to have.
Further, for example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing is during the rainbow image display and the rainbow emission, and the sound output end timing is the rainbow image display end timing or the rainbow emission end timing, the premier cut-in ends. As a result, it is possible to make the premier cut-in a powerful production.
Further, for example, if the sound output end timing is after the rainbow image display end timing or the rainbow emission end timing, the premier cut-in image 58 and the player who did not notice the rainbow emission were executed the premier cut-in. It is possible to recognize.

Further, the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be any number of seconds, for example, 5 seconds or until the start of another effect (for example, the start of a button effect).

Further, the time for controlling the light emission in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the premier cut-in is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be any number of seconds, for example, 10 seconds. Further, the rainbow-colored light emission control accompanying the start of the premier cut-in may be continued until another effect is started (for example, until the hit motion effect is started).

The example of FIG. 24 and the above-mentioned changes regarding the mode of the premier cut-in are also applicable to the premier button effect. Specifically, the start time of the premier cut-in is read as "at the start of the premier button production (and at the start of the valid period)", and the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is read as "valid period". Further, the premier cut-in image 58 is read as "button image 51 related to the premier button effect", the premier cut-in sound is read as "confirmed sound related to the premier button effect", and the rainbow of the frame member 3 etc. accompanying the start of the premier cut-in. The color emission control is read as "rainbow-colored emission control with the start of the premier button production".

[Transformation example of cut-in effect]
A modified example of the cut-in effect will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example in which the premier cut-in image 58 is superimposed and displayed on another cut-in image.

The configuration described with reference to FIG. 25 is a configuration in which after the cut-in image is displayed, another cut-in image having higher reliability is superimposed and displayed on the front side.

Specifically, for example, during SPSP reach 1 (during a battle between the character and the enemy: see, for example, FIG. 20), a weak cut-in, a medium cut-in, or a strong cut-in is executed to cut each cut-in. An in-image (see FIGS. 14) is displayed (see FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c)). Immediately after that (for example, after 0.5 seconds), the premier cut-in is superimposed on the front side of the cut-in image being displayed (see FIG. 25 (d)).

After the cut-in effect is completed, any of the characters A to C related to the cut-in image displayed first participates in the battle between the own character and the enemy. This makes it possible to suggest both the type of character and the confirmation of the jackpot.

It should be noted that each character related to the cut-in image may appear in SPSP reach 1 even before the start of the cut-in effect. Further, the character related to the cut-in image does not have to appear in SPSP reach 1.

The effect means for emitting light with respect to the cut-in effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and other effect means capable of emitting light may be controlled to emit light during the above effect. For example, the light emission control may be performed so that the effecting object 7 which is not operating during the premier cut-in appears to emit light in rainbow colors, or the start port lamp 38 may emit light in rainbow colors.

[Transformation example of button production]
Depending on the operation during the button effect, the effect images other than the small symbol 502, the blue characters indicating the special 1 hold number, and the red characters indicating the special 2 hold number are hidden from the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp is displayed. The 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamp 262 may be temporarily turned off. In this case, as the operation effect is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later), the light emission control in rainbow colors is started for the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamps 262. You may.

When the above configuration is adopted, for example, the production proceeds in the following two flows according to the operation during the premier button production. Specifically, for example, when the rainbow-colored light emission control related to the above-mentioned effect means is continuous over the execution time of the premier button effect and the hit operation effect, or when the hit operation effect is started after the premier button effect and the hit operation effect are not continuous. Along with this, the rainbow-colored light emission control may be started again. As a result, it is possible to change the mode at the start of the hit motion effect, and it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, by temporarily ending the rainbow-colored emission, the relationship of the rainbow-colored emission time related to the premier button effect <the rainbow-colored emission time after the end of the premier button effect can be established, and the rainbow-colored emission related to the latter can be established. It is possible to make it stand out more.

It should be noted that the rainbow-colored light emission control associated with the start of the premier button effect may be terminated before the expiration date. Specifically, for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C may be made to emit light in rainbow colors for a period shorter than the effective period (for example, 1 second) from the start of the premier button effect. Regarding the effect button 26 (button lamp 262), it is sufficient that the light emission in any of white and red light emission colors is continued until the valid period ends even after the end of the light emission control in the rainbow color. For example, the button lamp 262 is controlled to emit rainbow colors so as to synchronize with the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start of the premier button effect, and the rainbow color is used. After the end of the light emission control, the light emission may be controlled to a color other than rainbow color (for example, red) until the end of the valid period.

According to the above configuration, with respect to the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C, the relationship of the rainbow-colored emission time associated with the premier cut-in> the rainbow-colored emission time associated with the premier button effect is established. This makes it possible to make the first rainbow-colored emission more impressive than the second rainbow-colored emission. Further, according to the above configuration, with respect to the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C, the relationship of the rainbow-colored emission time associated with the premier cut-in = the rainbow-colored emission time associated with the premier button effect is established. As a result, the light emission time in the rainbow color can be made the same for the first time and the second time, and more common items can be obtained between the premier cut-in and the premier button production, so that both productions can be more related. Is.

As another variation of the button effect described above, a button effect suggesting that the probability variation hit is confirmed (that is, the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R probability variation is always stopped and displayed) may be executed. Specifically, for example, the premier button effect (see FIGS. 16C and 16E) may be executed at the timing immediately after the end of the hit operation effect. When the effect button 26 is operated during this premier button effect, a success effect is always executed regardless of the type of reach symbol according to the operation, and a hit notification by an odd number of symbols may be performed. ..

The effect means for emitting light with respect to the button effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and other effect means capable of emitting light may be controlled to emit light during the above effect. For example, the light emission control may be performed so that the effecting object 7 that is not operating (or is operating) emits light in rainbow colors during the premier button effect, or the start port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors. You may let me.

[Variations of light emission control related to hit motion effect, victory effect, hit notification, and success effect]
The effect means for emitting light with respect to the hit operation effect, the victory effect, the hit notification, and the success effect are not limited to those described above, and other effect means capable of emitting light may be controlled to emit light during the above effect. For example, during the hit notification, the success effect, and the victory effect, the light emission control may be performed so that the non-operating effect object 7 emits light in rainbow colors, or the start port lamp 38 is rainbow-colored. You may make it emit light with.

It is not necessary to start the rainbow-colored light emission control from the start of the success effect and the victory effect. For example, each effect starts after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of each effect. You may start emitting light in rainbow colors. Even with such a configuration, by setting the timing at which the rainbow-colored effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as the start of each effect, the display time of the rainbow-colored effect image <rainbow-colored light emission for each effect. The relationship of time will be established. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and then make the entire gaming machine emit light in rainbow colors.

It should be noted that the light emission control may be performed in a color other than the rainbow color (for example, yellow) during the execution of the victory effect, the hit notification, and the success effect. As a result, while the premier cut-in, the premier button effect, and the hit motion effect are being executed, the rainbow-colored light emission control is possible, while the other effects are being executed, the rainbow-colored light emission control is not possible. , It is possible to realize an impressive production with a sharp edge.

[Other variants]
In the present embodiment, for example, in order to enhance the feeling of exhilaration for a big hit, a configuration is adopted in which the light emission time in the second rainbow color is longer than the light emission time in the first rainbow color, but the first time. A configuration may be adopted in which the emission time in the second rainbow color is shorter than the emission time in the rainbow color, or the emission time in the first and second rainbow colors is the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impression that the effect related to the first rainbow-colored light emission control (for example, the premier cut-in effect) gives to the entire variable effect.

The mode of the cut-in effect and the button effect is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and may be any mode. For example, it may be an effect suggesting that the reliability is relatively high by displaying an effect in which a large number of characters (for example, one's own character) cross the screen, or an effect of operating the effect item 7.

By executing the cut-in effect and the button effect based on the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process, the reliability of the look-ahead target and the content of the effect may be suggested during the variation effect one or more before the variation. .. For example, a premier cut-in or a premier button effect may be used to notify that the look-ahead target is a big hit.

[Icon change effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30, an “icon change effect” capable of changing the hold icon 54 and the icon 53 from a normal mode (for example, a default white icon) to another color or pattern. Will be explained. The icon change effect is one of the notice effects. The icon change effect in the present embodiment includes a "hold icon change effect" that can change the mode of the hold icon 54 and a "icon change effect" that can change the icon 53. The "hold icon change effect" is a notice effect (look-ahead effect) executed based on the pre-determination information, and is an effect suggesting the reliability of the jackpot of the target of the pre-determination process. The hold icon change effect is, for example, an effect executed from the time when the game ball wins the start opening to the time when the special symbol determination based on the prize is executed. The "icon change effect" is a notice effect that suggests the reliability executed based on the determination result of the special symbol determination, and is an effect executed after the execution of the special symbol determination.

(Hold icon change effect)
The hold icon change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in which the hold icon 54 changes from green to the premier mode due to the hold icon change effect. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an icon mode determination table for holding the first special symbol determination, which occurs when the number of holdings for the first special symbol determination is 1 or 2 in the normal gaming state.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect based on the prior determination information when the game ball wins the first start port 11 (see FIG. 40). When it is decided to execute the hold icon change effect, the hold icon 54 related to the look-ahead target from the hold icon display start timing to immediately before the start of the change effect corresponding to the target of the pre-judgment process (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead target"). Determine the aspect (change pattern).

When the hold icon change effect is executed, for example, the hold icon 54 related to the look-ahead target is displayed in any one of white (as default), blue, green, red, and "premier". For example, the mode of the hold icon 54 has high reliability in the order of white <blue <green <red <premier, and in the hold icon change effect, it may change irreversibly according to this order (see FIG. 27). The "premier" is a mode for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, which can be executed only when the look-ahead target is a jackpot, and is a production image in which the premier character D wears a rainbow-colored effect image (Fig.). 26 (D), see icon 2).

Further, in the present embodiment, with the start of the hold icon change effect, the start port lamp 38 is set to the emission color (that is, white, blue, green, red, or premier) corresponding to the color of the hold icon 54 related to the look-ahead target. Light emission is controlled by the rainbow color corresponding to.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the hold icon change effect or the icon change effect is not executed in the normal mode, the start port lamp 38 is controlled to be turned off.

While referring to FIG. 26, for example, when the number of holdings for the first special symbol determination (the number of holdings for the special 1) is 1 during the variable effect corresponding to the icon 53, the game ball wins the first starting port 11. Then, the case where the execution of the hold icon change effect is decided will be described. In this example, at the time of winning, a new hold icon 54 (referred to as icon 2) is displayed in green, and this icon 2 is displayed as a variation effect one before the variation effect corresponding to the look-ahead target (hereinafter, “1 variation”). It may be called "before".) It has been decided to perform a hold icon change effect of the change pattern of changing to the premier mode at the start. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 26, it is assumed that the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variablely displayed at any time.

As illustrated in FIG. 26 (A), a new hold icon 54 (icon 2) is displayed in green at the timing corresponding to the winning, and the start port lamp 38 is green due to the light emission control accompanying the hold icon change effect. Starts emitting light with. The panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit light in a light emission pattern different from that of the start port lamp 38. For example, during the variable display in which the disparity is notified, the light emission control is performed in such a manner that it appears in synchronization with the rhythm of the BGM output from the speaker 24.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined winning sound (for example, an effect sound of “picon”) is output from the speaker 24 at the start of displaying the hold icon 54 accompanied by the execution of the hold icon change effect (see FIG. 26 (A)). ).

In this embodiment, even if the hold icon change effect (and the icon change effect) is executed, the blue character indicating the special 1 hold number and the red character indicating the special 2 hold number (in the lower left corner of the screen in FIG. 26 (A)). The aspect of (immediately above the small symbol 502) does not change.

When the variation effect corresponding to the icon 53 is completed, the icon 1 which was the first hold icon 54 is shifted and displayed as the icon, and the variation effect corresponding to the icon 1 is started (FIG. 26 (B). )reference). Along with this, the icon 2, which was the second hold icon 54, is shifted and displayed at the place where the icon 1 was displayed.

As illustrated in FIG. 26B, at the start of the fluctuation effect before one change, an “icon change image” suggesting the mode of the hold icon 54 after the change is displayed in the center of the screen as an effect display related to the hold icon change effect. It is displayed large. The icon change image is an effect image having the same (or content-related) aspect as the mode after the hold icon 54 has changed. In the example of FIG. 26, the hold icon change effect is executed in a mode of notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, and an icon change image (premier) suggesting a change to the premier mode is displayed. The icon change image (premier) is an effect image for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, and is an effect image accompanied by a rainbow-colored effect image.

Further, in the hold icon change effect, from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier), an effect sound of "cui" (hereinafter referred to as "icon change sound (premier)") for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed is used. Output from the speaker 24 (see FIGS. 26B and 26C).

As illustrated in FIG. 26 (B), as the light emission control accompanying the hold icon change effect, the game board 2, the frame member 3, and the vicinity of the first start port are rainbow-colored from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier). Light emission control is performed in rainbow colors between the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the start port lamp 38 so that the lamps can be seen as emitting light.

As illustrated in FIG. 26C, in the present embodiment, the effect display in which the icon change image is combined with the hold icon 54 (icon 2 in this example) is executed following the display of the icon change image. If the icon change image is successfully combined with the hold icon 54, the hold icon 54 changes to the same (or similar) mode as the icon change image, and if the combination fails, the hold icon 54 mode does not change. In the present embodiment, when the icon change image (premier) is displayed, the coalescence is successful and the mode of the hold icon 54 changes to the mode suggested by the icon change image (combination success probability 100%). On the other hand, when the icon change image suggesting the change to blue, green, or red is displayed, the combination fails and the icon change image is deleted, and the mode of the hold icon 54 remains unchanged. There is also (so-called Gase: sometimes called hold icon change production (Gase)).

In the present embodiment, the icon change image may try to be combined with the icon 53 (the icon change effect described later). In this case as well, there are cases where the icon change image succeeds in merging with the icon 53, and there are cases where the merging fails and the icon change image is deleted, and the aspect of the icon 53 remains unchanged. So-called Gase: Sometimes called the icon change effect (Gase)).

The panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C correspond to the icon change image from the start of displaying the hold icon change effect (gase) or the icon change image related to the icon change effect (gase). Light emission control with the light emission color is started. This light emission control ends when the coalescence fails and the icon change image is erased, and the light emission control in the light emission corresponding to the variation effect is restarted. Further, regarding the start port lamp 38, even if the hold icon change effect (gase) or the icon change image related to the icon change effect (gase) is displayed or erased, the light emission control does not change under these conditions.

As illustrated in FIG. 26 (D), when the icon change image (premier) is successfully combined with the icon 2, the icon 2 changes to the premier mode. Specifically, the icon 2 is, for example, an effect image in which the premier character D wears a rainbow-colored effect image (hereinafter, "premier character D"), which is the same (or similar) mode as the icon change image (premier). It may be called "rainbow-colored production image".). At the same time, the light emission control that the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit in rainbow colors due to the hold icon change effect is completed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamp corresponding to the variation effect related to the icon 1 are completed. Light emission control with 37A to C is resumed. The start port lamp 38 continues to control the light emission in rainbow colors accompanying the hold icon change effect until after the start of the variation effect related to the icon 2 (for example, until the end of the variation effect related to the icon 2).

Therefore, in the hold icon change effect suggesting a change to the premiere in the present embodiment, the display of the rainbow-colored effect image (icon change image (premier) and hold icon after change) related to the premier character D is a board lamp. The 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are continued even after the end of the light emission control in which the frame lamps 37A to C emit light in rainbow colors. That is, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <rainbow color emission time between the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C <display time of the rainbow color effect image related to the premier character D <= start port lamp 38 The relationship of iridescent emission time is established.

In the hold icon change effect that suggests a change to the premiere, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <display time of the icon change image (premier) = the rainbow color of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C. The relationship of light emission time <rainbow color light emission time of the start port lamp 38 is established.

In this embodiment, regarding the hold icon change effect suggesting a change to a mode other than the premier mode, the output time of the icon change sound <the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C in the color corresponding to the icon change image are used. The relationship of light emission time <display time at which the effect image of the same aspect as the icon change image is displayed is established. In addition, regarding the hold icon change effect that suggests a change to a mode other than the premier mode, the output time of the icon change sound <display time of the icon change image = board lamps 25A and 25B and frame lamps 37A to C in colors corresponding to the icon change image. The relationship between the light emission time and the light emission time of the start port lamp 38 in the color corresponding to the icon change image is established.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, an example of the icon mode determination table for holding the first special symbol determination, which occurs when the number of special 1 holdings is 1 or 2 in the normal gaming state, will be described. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the reach ratio differs depending on the number of holds (see FIG. 9 (C)). Inconsistency may occur between the above and the variation pattern actually used in the variation display of the first special symbol. However, depending on the setting of the fluctuation pattern table (described later with reference to FIG. 37) for determining the fluctuation pattern for loss, the number of special 1 hold is any of 0 to 3 when the first special symbol determination is executed. However, there is pre-judgment information that will be determined in the same fluctuation pattern. In addition, there is pre-judgment information that does not cause a big problem even if the hold icon change effect is executed, such as the same reach effect is executed even if the variation pattern actually used is inconsistent. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executably controlled based on such prior determination information.

For example, when the hold of the first special symbol determination occurs, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the icon mode determination table for holding the first special symbol determination, the current number of special 1 hold, and the look-ahead target. The change pattern of the hold icon is determined based on the corresponding pre-determination information and the mode random number for the hold icon change effect. The hold icon change effect mode random number is a random number for determining the mode at the time of winning the hold icon and the subsequent change pattern (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “change pattern”).

For example, in the hold icon mode determination table, the determination value to be compared with the hold icon change effect mode random number is set in advance in any of a plurality of change patterns exemplified in the "icon display mode" column in FIG. 27. It is an assigned table. In the present embodiment, for example, an icon mode determination table is prepared in advance for each gaming state and for each number of reserved first special symbols. FIG. 27 is an example of an icon mode determination table for holding, and FIG. 27 (A) is a holding table for determining a first special symbol that occurs when the number of special 1 holdings is 1 in a normal gaming state. Reference numeral 27 (B) is a table for holding the first special symbol determination, which occurs when the number of special 1 holdings is 2 in the normal gaming state. In the "green → premier" example in the column of "icon display mode" in FIG. 27 (A), the hold icon 54 (corresponding to the icon 2 in FIG. 26) is displayed in green at the time of winning, and the change before one change. It means that it will change to a premiere during the production. Further, in the "white → white" exemplified in the column of "icon display mode" in FIG. 27 (A), the hold icon 54 is displayed in white at the time of winning, and the start port lamp 38 starts emitting light in white. 1 It means that the mode of the hold icon 54 remains white and does not change during the fluctuation effect before the fluctuation. Further, in the "white → blue → green" exemplified in the column of "icon display mode" in FIG. 27 (B), the hold icon 54 is displayed in white at the time of winning and changes to blue during the fluctuation effect before 2 fluctuations. 3. It means that it changes to green during the fluctuation effect before the fluctuation. The sub CPU 131 determines the change pattern of the hold icon based on which change pattern the random number for effect of changing the hold icon matches the determination value assigned to which change pattern.

In the present embodiment, "0 to 99" is set as a determination value to be compared with the execution random number for the hold icon change effect. As an example, when the pre-judgment information related to the hold of the first special symbol determination generated when the number of special 1 hold is 1 in the normal gaming state shows the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D), the SPSP reach. It is possible to perform a direct hit variation effect in which a big hit is notified. Judgment values to be compared in the case of such pre-judgment information are assigned as follows for each of the change patterns exemplified in the column of "Big hit (%) SPSP reach and big hit direct hit" in FIG. 27 (A). Has been done. The numerical value in brackets indicates the assigned judgment value, and the numerical value in parentheses indicates the determination ratio.
It remains white from the time of winning to the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "0" (1%)
White at the time of winning and changed to blue at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "2, 3" (2%)
It remains blue from the time of winning to the end of the fluctuation production one change before: "4-8" (5%)
White at the time of winning and changed to green at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "8-12" (5%)
Blue at the time of winning and changed to green at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "13-22" (10%)
It remains green from the time of winning to the end of the fluctuation production one change before: "23-32" (10%)
White at the time of winning and changed to red at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "33-42" (10%)
Blue at the time of winning and changed to red at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "43-54" (12%)
Green at the time of winning and changed to red at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "55-69" (15%)
It remains red from the time of winning until the end of the fluctuation production one change before: "70-89" (20%)
White at the time of winning and changed to premiere at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "90, 91" (2%)
It is blue at the time of winning and changed to premiere at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "92, 93" (2%)
It is green at the time of winning, and it has changed to the premiere at the end of the fluctuation production 1 before the change: "94, 95" (2%)
It is red at the time of winning and changed to the premiere at the end of the fluctuation production before 1 change: "96, 97" (2%)
From the time of winning to the end of the fluctuation production one change before, it remains the premiere: "98, 99" (2%)

As shown by the determination ratios exemplified in the "big hit (%)" column and the "loss (%)" column in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the look-ahead target is a big hit or a loss. The hold icon 54 is more likely to change to a more reliable mode when a highly reliable reach effect (for example, SPSP reach) is executed than when only a low reliability reach effect (for example, normal reach) is executed. (See FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (B)).

Further, comparing FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (B), in the present embodiment, the hold icon 54 is larger than the case where the number of special 1 hold when the hold of the first special symbol determination occurs is smaller. Is likely to change to a highly reliable mode. For example, the rate of the final change to red is 20% at the time of big hit and 10% at the time of loss when the number of special 1 hold is 1, while the rate of change to red is 2 at the time of special 1 hold. Even if it is a big hit, it is a maximum of 10%, and if it is lost, it is 5%.

Further, as illustrated in the column of "direct hit" in "SPSP reach jackpot" of "big hit (%)" in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (B), in the present embodiment, the look-ahead target is a variation of direct hit. If it is related to the effect, it is possible to execute the hold icon change effect that changes to the premier mode. However, if the look-ahead target is related to the variable effect per resurrection, the execution of the hold icon change effect that changes to the premier mode is restricted.

If it is decided to execute the hold icon change effect, the configuration may always change to a mode other than the default. For example, it is decided to leave it white from the time of winning until the end of the change effect one change before. In this case, the white hold icon 54 in the non-blinking mode may be changed to the white hold icon 54 in the fast blinking mode.

The ratio illustrated in FIG. 27 is only an example, and any ratio may be used. For example, regardless of whether the look-ahead target is related to the variation effect of the direct hit or the resurrection hit, the hold icon change effect that changes to the premier mode may be executably controlled.

(The icon change effect)
Next, the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. 28 and 29 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example in which the icon changes in the order of green → red → premier due to the icon change effect. FIG. 30 describes an example of a determination ratio of a change pattern of the icon change effect that finally changes the icon to the premier mode in the variation effect in which the SPSP reach 1 can be executed via the normal reach and the SP reach in the normal gaming state. It is explanatory drawing for this.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect is different from the hold icon change effect only in that the icon change effect is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, not the prior determination information. Specifically, when the variable effect is started, the icon change effect determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect that changes the icon, and if so, at which timing of the variable effect. It differs from the hold icon change effect in that it decides whether to change it. Except for this point, the icon change effect is exactly the same as the hold icon change effect, and therefore the description of the mode of the icon change effect will be omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, a specific example in which the premier cut-in is executed as the cut-in effect and the premier button effect is determined as the button effect when the icon finally changes to the premier mode will be described. do.

The variation effect according to the specific example of FIGS. 28 and 29 is the same as that of FIGS. 17 and 18 to 21, among the flows exemplified in FIG. 13, FIGS. 13 (a), (b), (c), (d). ), (S), (v), (e), (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), (n) A concrete example of the hit pattern is shown. That is, the variation effect according to the specific example of FIGS. 28 and 29 is executed corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D) of the first special symbol, as in FIGS. 17 and 18 to 21. It is possible. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 develops into SPSP reach 1 in which the own character and the enemy F fight through normal reach and SP reach at the start of the variable effect, and the own character and the enemy are in the SPSP reach 1. It is assumed that a variable production pattern for notifying the jackpot after the character C participates in the battle with is determined.

In this example, at the start of the variable effect, the execution of the premier cut-in is determined as the cut-in effect, and the execution of the premier button effect is determined as the button effect. In addition, at the start of the variable effect, it is possible to execute a mini character effect that displays a large bird (for example, an enlarged display image of the bird of FIG. 18A) suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed at the start of the variable effect. It has been determined (see FIG. 28 (B)). In addition, when the variable effect starts, the icon is changed to red immediately after the variable effect starts, and the premiere mode is at the timing when the character C participates in the battle between the own character and the enemy (the timing immediately after the cut-in effect ends). It has been decided to execute the icon change effect of the change pattern of changing to.

As illustrated in FIG. 28 (A), the loss is notified by the end of the fluctuation effect before one fluctuation, and when the predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the icon shift display is performed and the green is held. The icon 54 is displayed as the icon. It should be noted that the start port lamp 38 continues to control the light emission in green corresponding to the green hold icon 54 during the fluctuation effect before one fluctuation.

In the example of FIG. 28 (B), unlike the example of FIG. 18 (A), as described above, a mini character effect for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed is executed at the start of the variable effect. However, even if such a mini character effect is executed, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are controlled to emit light by the light emission corresponding to the variable effect, so that they do not emit light in rainbow colors. This makes it possible to suggest that the jackpot is implicitly confirmed only for some players.

As illustrated in FIG. 28C, an icon change image (red) suggesting a change to red is displayed large in the center of the screen at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect. The icon change image (red) is an effect image suggesting that the reliability is relatively high. In the icon change effect, the effect sound "pew" indicating that the icon change effect is being executed from the start of displaying the icon change image (red) (hereinafter referred to as "icon change sound (other than premier)"). ) Is output from the speaker 24 (see FIGS. 28 (C) and 28 (D)).

Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 28 (C) and 28 (D), from the start of displaying the icon change image (red), the game board 2 and the frame member are used as light emission control accompanying the icon change effect that changes to red. Light emission control is performed between the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C so that the panel lamps 25A and 25B appear to emit red light. With respect to the start port lamp 38, the light emission control in green corresponding to the green icon is continued (see FIGS. 28 (C) and 28 (D)).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the icon change image (premier) suggesting the change to the premier aspect is displayed, the hold icon or the icon always changes (combination success probability 100%: FIG. 26, FIG. 29). (A)-(C)). On the other hand, when the icon change image suggesting the change to another aspect is displayed, it does not change when the hold icon or the icon changes (when the hold icon change effect or the icon change effect). There is a case (when it is a hold icon change effect (gase) or the icon change effect (gase)) (combination success probability is less than 100%). Therefore, it is a condition of light emission control that the start port lamp 38 is confirmed to change. Specifically, when the icon change image (premier) is displayed, the start port lamp 38 starts emitting light in rainbow colors from the start of the display. In addition, when an icon change image other than the icon change image (premier) is displayed, the start port lamp 38 is not emitted in the color corresponding to the mode in which the change is suggested from the start of the display, and the change is suspended. From the start of displaying the icon or the icon, the start port lamp 38 is started to emit light in a color corresponding to the changed mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 28 (D), when the icon change image (red) succeeds in merging with the green icon, the icon is, for example, a red circle in which the icon change image is in the same mode (or a similar mode). It changes to the production image of. At the same time, the red light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C accompanying the icon change effect is completed, and the light emission of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C corresponding to the variation effect is completed. Control resumes. With respect to the start port lamp 38, the light emission control of the start port lamp 38 accompanying the icon change effect is started so that the vicinity of the first start port appears to emit red light from the time when the icon display is started after the change. In the variable effect of this time, the start port lamp 38 continues to control the light emission in red according to the icon change effect until the next time the icon changes.

Therefore, in the icon change effect suggesting the change to red in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image of the red circle (the icon change image (red) and the icon after the change) is the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamp. It is continued even after the end of the light emission control in red with 37A to C. That is, the relationship of the output time of the icon change sound (other than the premier) <red emission time between the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C <the display time of the effect image of the red circle is established.

Output time of icon change sound (other than premier) <Display time of icon change image (red) = Red light emission time between board lamps 25A and 25B and frame lamps 37A to C <Relationship between red light emission time of start port lamp 38 Is established.

The icon change effect (and the hold icon change effect) that changes to blue or green in the present embodiment includes the mode in which the icon changes to red, the color of the icon change image, the board lamps 25A and 25B, and the frame lamp 37A. It is the same except that the emission colors of ~ C and the start port lamp 38 are different.

After that, it develops into SPSP reach via normal reach and SP reach, and a premier cut-in is performed as illustrated in FIG. 28 (E). From the start of the premier cut-in, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C emit rainbow-colored light by the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in. With respect to the start port lamp 38, the light emission control of the start port lamp 38 in red is continued by the light emission control related to the icon change effect corresponding to the red color of the icon.

With the start of the premier cut-in, the start port lamp 38 may emit light in rainbow colors by the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in. That is, the light emission control related to the premier cut-in may be executed with priority over the light emission control related to the icon change effect. After the end of the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in, for example, the light emission control corresponding to the red color of the icon may be restarted to make the start port lamp 38 emit red light. Alternatively, for example, even after the premier cut-in is completed, the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in may not be terminated, and the start port lamp 38 may be continuously emitted in rainbow colors.

As illustrated in FIG. 29 (A), immediately after erasing the premier cut-in image related to the premier cut-in (that is, immediately before the character C participates in the battle between the own character and the enemy), the jackpot is confirmed. As the effect, the icon change effect suggesting a change to the premier aspect is executed. As a result, the icon change image (premier) accompanied by the rainbow-colored effect image is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. As illustrated in FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B), from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier), for example, an icon change sound (premier) of "cui" is output from the speaker 24. Further, from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier), the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the start port lamp 38 are rainbow-colored by the light emission control accompanying the icon change effect that changes to the premier mode. Is emitted.

In this way, following the premier cut-in and when the icon change effect is executed in the mode of determining the jackpot, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C continue to emit rainbow colors over these effects. It will be. As a result, it is possible to make different notice effects have continuity, and it is possible to realize an effect that makes it easy for the player to understand that it is a big hit.

As illustrated in FIG. 29 (C), the icon change image (premier) succeeds in merging with the red icon at the timing when the character C participates in the battle between the own character and the enemy, and the icon is the mode of the premiere. Changes to. Specifically, the icon is, for example, an effect image (rainbow related to the premier character D) in which the premier character D wears a rainbow-colored effect image in the same mode (or similar mode) as the icon change image (premier). It changes to a color production image). At the same time, the rainbow-colored light emission control between the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C accompanying the icon change effect is completed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C corresponding to the variation effect are completed. Light emission control resumes. With respect to the start port lamp 38, the rainbow-colored light emission is continued.

Therefore, in the icon change effect suggesting the change to the premiere in the present embodiment, the display of the rainbow-colored effect image (icon change image (premier) and the icon after the change) related to the premier character D is a board lamp. It is continued even after the light emission control of 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C in rainbow colors is completed. That is, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <rainbow color emission time between the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C <display time of the rainbow color effect image related to the premier character D <= start port lamp 38 The relationship of iridescent emission time is established.

Further, in the icon change effect suggesting a change to the premiere, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <display time of the icon change image (premier) = the rainbow color of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C. The relationship of light emission time <rainbow color light emission time of the start port lamp 38 is established.

As illustrated in FIG. 29 (D), when the start timing of the button suggestion effect arrives, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are white as the effect image related to the button suggestion effect is displayed. Starts blinking with. With respect to the start port lamp 38, the rainbow-colored light emission is continued. In this way, the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are used to control the light emission associated with the button suggestion effect, and the start port lamp 38 is used to control the light emission associated with the icon change effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 29 (E), when the start timing of the premier button effect arrives, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C are rainbow-colored as the effect image related to the button effect is displayed. Start emitting light at. Further, when the button lamp 262 starts emitting light in rainbow color, the effect button 26, which has been turned off from the start of fluctuation, emits light in rainbow color. The start port lamp 38 continues to emit rainbow colors by the light emission control related to the icon change effect even before the start of the premier button effect. In this way, the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the button lamps 262 are used to control the light emission associated with the premier button effect, and the start port lamp 38 is used to control the light emission associated with the icon change effect. Will be done.

With the start of the premier button effect, the light emission control of the start port lamp 38 may be switched from the light emission control related to the icon change effect to the light emission control related to the premier button effect. Regardless of which light emission control is performed, the start port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors, but unlike the light emission control related to the icon change effect, the panel lamps 25A and 25B are used for the light emission control related to the premier button effect. And the frame lamps 37A to C (for example, the timing at which the emission color is switched is the same as those of these various lamps (see FIGS. 2 and 3)) can be used to control the emission of the start port lamp 38 in rainbow colors. It is possible. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the rainbow-colored light emission of various lamps with the start of the premier button production. For example, with respect to the start port lamp 38, during the premier button effect, the light emission control related to the premier button effect is executed with priority over the light emission control related to the icon change effect, and the premier button effect ends (that is, the end of the valid period). Depending on the situation, the light emission control related to the icon change effect may be restarted. Further, with respect to the start port lamp 38, the light emission control related to the icon change effect may be terminated on condition that the premier button effect is started, or the light emission control related to the premier button effect may be performed during the premier button effect. , May be turned off. Further, regarding the start port lamp 38, light emission control related to the effect to be started with the start of various effects (specifically, hit operation effect, victory effect, hit notification, revariation effect, success effect, failure effect). May be started or turned off.

After FIG. 29 (E), the effect proceeds in the same manner as in the examples described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 21, and the direct hit occurs (see FIG. 29 (F)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the change pattern of the icon change effect that finally changes the icon to the premier mode in the variable effect in which the SPSP reach 1 can be executed via the normal reach and the SP reach in the normal gaming state. An example of the determination ratio of is described. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (FIG. 43). reference). If it is decided to execute the icon change effect, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, for example, the final color of the icon is based on the variation effect pattern and the current color of the hold icon to be digested this time. The final aspect, which is the aspect, and the change timing for changing the icon are determined by a random number lottery. Here, for example, one or a plurality of timings at which the icon change effect (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) can be executed are predetermined for each variation effect. For example, the sub CPU 131 determines the timing at which the icon is changed to the final mode in the current variation effect when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and when the icon is changed a plurality of times, the change timing of each time is determined. And the aspect after each change. Based on such a change pattern, the icon change effect is executed.

According to the example of the determination ratio illustrated in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, when the final aspect of the icon is the premier aspect, the SPSP reach 1 start before the start of the SPSP reach 1 (for example, at the start of the variable effect). The icon is more likely to change than after (for example, at the time of transition to the own character advantageous route or the own character disadvantageous route (see FIGS. 13 (h) and 13 (i))). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the change at an early stage is more reliable.

If the icon changes to the premier mode by the second change, it is in SPSP Reach 1 (specifically, in the battle between the own character and the enemy, any one of characters A to C). It changes to the timing when the character enters the war). As a result, for example, even if the reliability is changed to a relatively low mode (for example, blue) by the first change, it is possible to enjoy the effect while feeling a feeling of excitement until the end of the variable effect.

The ratio illustrated in FIG. 30 is only an example, and any ratio may be used. For example, regardless of whether the look-ahead target is related to the variation effect of the direct hit or the resurrection hit, the hold icon change effect that changes to the premier mode may be executably controlled.

It should be noted that the icon change effect (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) of the present embodiment requires a certain amount of time to display the effect related to the change. Therefore, the icon change effect may be infeasibly controlled in a specific variation effect (for example, a variation effect corresponding to a loss pattern H12 (see FIG. 9D) having a variation time of 3 seconds). Further, as an icon change effect in which the effect display (and the time required for the change) related to the change are different from each other, the icon change effect that can be executed in any variation effect and the specific variation effect (for example, the variation pattern H12 for loss) are supported. An icon change effect that cannot be executed in the variable effect) may be prepared in advance.

[Transformation example of icon change effect]
In the icon change effect (hold icon change effect or the icon change effect), the timing at which the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C start to emit light in the color corresponding to the icon change image is displayed on the icon change image. It may be before the start or after the display starts. Further, the above timing may be before the start of output of the icon change sound (premier) or after the start of output.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a hold icon change effect suggesting a change to the premier mode, after the display of the icon change image (premier) is started (for example, 2 seconds later), the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C and the start port lamp 38 may be controlled to emit rainbow colors. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the icon change image and then make the entire gaming machine emit rainbow-colored light.

Further, for example, the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the start port lamp 38 may be controlled to emit rainbow colors before the display of the icon change image (premier) is started (for example, 2 seconds before). This makes it possible to display the icon change image after suggesting to the player in advance that the jackpot is confirmed.

Regarding the icon change effect, control is performed so that the relationship of the icon change sound (premier) output time <display time of the rainbow-colored effect image related to the premier character D <= time of rainbow-colored light emission control is established. You may.

In the icon change effect (holding icon change effect or the icon change effect) that suggests a change to the premier mode, the display time of the icon change image (premier), the output time of the icon change sound (premier), and the board lamp 25A. And 25B and the frame lamps 37A to C may have any long and short relationship with each other.

The effect means for emitting light with respect to the icon change effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and one or two of the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the start port lamp 38 may be emitted. Other effect means capable of emitting light (for example, effect 7) may be emitted.

Hereinafter, an example of the processing performed by the gaming machine 1 in order to realize the various effects described above will be described in detail.

[Timer interrupt processing by the game control board 100]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed on the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the game control board 100. The game control board 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. When the timer interrupt occurs, the game control board 100 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 31. The processes shown in FIGS. 31 to 37 are performed according to the instructions issued by the main CPU 101 based on the program stored in the main ROM 102.

First, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 executes a random number update process for updating the symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number by software (step S1).

For example, each random number is added by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as the counter that performs the process of step S1, and each random number is returned to "0" and updated after reaching the preset maximum value. The jackpot random numbers may be updated by software, or each random number may be generated in advance by calculating a value generated by using the random number circuit 104 and a value generated by software.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 111 and the second start port 12 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start port 11. A switch process for determining the state of the detection signal input from each switch such as the second start port switch 112 is executed (step S2). This switch processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then outputs the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the indicated special symbol is executed (step S3). In the special symbol processing, whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are determined. This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 35.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol determination, causes the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the processing in step S4, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port 12 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination, the electric tulip processing for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113. Is executed (step S5).

Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 101 controls the large winning opening control unit 118 to open the large winning opening 13 when it is determined in the process of step S3 that the big winning opening is a big hit. Execute (step S6). Although detailed description is omitted, the big winning opening opening control process is a process for controlling a big hit game, and a special symbol (big hit symbol) indicating that it is determined to execute the big hit game is the first special symbol display 41. Or, it is performed when the stop display is displayed on the second special symbol display 42.

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

Following the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 and the effect contents in the process step before step S7. The process is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 111, and determines the special symbol at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input. The first start port switch process including the process of acquiring random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers) is executed (step S21). This first start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 33.

Next, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the second start port switch 112, and acquires a random number for determining a special symbol at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input. The second start port switch process including the process to be performed is executed (step S22). This second start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34.

Then, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114, and executes the gate switch process of acquiring the normal symbol random number at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input (step S23). ).

[First start port switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 32. As illustrated in FIG. 33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first start port switch 111 is "ON" based on whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input. (Step S2101). For example, when an ON signal indicating that the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON” is input, it is determined that the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON”.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the first start port switch 111 is "ON" (step S2101: YES), the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination includes a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation. Acquire a pattern random number (steps S2102-2105).

Next, in the main CPU 101, the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 103 is the maximum hold number Umax1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 (“4” in this embodiment). ) Is less than (step S2106).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S2106: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S2107).

Following the process of step S2107, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is "ON" (step S2108). This time-saving game flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the current gaming state is in the time-saving state, and conversely, is set to "OFF" when the current gaming state is in the non-time-saving state.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game flag is not "ON" (that is, "OFF") (step S2108: NO), the main CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process (step S2109). Specifically, the main CPU 101 hits the jackpot based on the acquired information acquired by the processes of steps S2102 to 2105 prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) and the fluctuation pattern determination process (see FIG. 37), which will be described later. It is determined in advance whether or not it is determined to be, and to which type the fluctuation pattern will be determined.

Following the process of step S2109, the main CPU 101 stores the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of step S2109 and various random numbers acquired by the process of steps S2102 to 2105 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103 (. Step S2110).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game flag is "ON" (step S2108: YES), the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers acquired in the processes of steps S2102 to 2105 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103 (step S2111).

When the process of step S2110 or step S2111 is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 103 (step S2112). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S2109. The hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

When the process of step S2112 is executed, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is not "ON" (step S2101: NO), or when it is determined that the hold number U1 is not less than the maximum hold number Umax1. (Step S2106: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG. 33.

[Second start port switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 34, the main CPU 101 has a second start port based on whether or not a detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input following the first start port switch process in step S21. It is determined whether or not the switch 112 is "ON" (step S2201). For example, when an ON signal indicating that the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON” is input, it is determined that the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON”.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is "ON" (step S2201: YES), the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination includes a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation. Acquire a pattern random number (steps S2202-2205).

Next, in the main CPU 101, the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is the maximum hold number Umax2 (“4” in the present embodiment) for the second special symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102. ) Is less than (step S2206).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S2206: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S2207).

Following the process of step S2207, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is "ON", as in the process of step S2108 (step S2208). When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game flag is "ON" (step S2208: YES), the main CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process (step S2209).

Following the process of step S2209, the main CPU 101 stores the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of step S2209 and various random numbers acquired by the process of steps S2202 to 2205 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103 (. Step S2210).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game flag is not "ON" (that is, "OFF") (step S2208: NO), the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers acquired in the processes of steps S2202 to 2205 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103. (Step S2211).

When the process of step S2210 or step S2211 is executed, the main CPU 101 sets a hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 103 (step S2112). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S2210. The hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

When the process of step S2212 is executed, when it is determined that the second start port switch 112 is not "ON" (step S2201: NO), or when it is determined that the hold number U2 is not less than the maximum hold number Umax2. (Step S2206: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG. 34.

[Special symbol processing by the game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 31.

As illustrated in FIG. 35, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (. Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold number U2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U2 is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the hold number U2 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S305). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U1 is not "1" or more (step S305: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

Although not shown in the figure, when it is determined that the hold number U1 is not "1" or more, the main CPU 101 has, for example, no hold of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination, and the special symbol. At the timing when the fluctuation display of is no longer performed, a customer waiting command for notifying that the customer waiting state has been reached is set in the main RAM 103. This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8 (see FIG. 31), and when the waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without displaying the variation of the special symbol as it is, the effect control board 130 The sub CPU 131 of the above sets, for example, a customer waiting effect start command instructing the start of the "customer waiting effect" in the sub RAM 133. The customer waiting effect is started in response to the transmission of the customer waiting effect start command to the image / acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 38). The "customer waiting effect" is, for example, an effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the loss is notified. For example, in the customer waiting production, a company name video (not shown) for promoting a company that manufactures or sells the gaming machine 1, a demo video (not shown) for promoting the gaming machine 1, and a gaming machine 1 Menu screens (not shown) for making settings are displayed in this order over time. In the present embodiment, the effector 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to C, and the start port lamps are provided so that the entire gaming machine can be seen as rainbow-colored when the reproduction of the company name video is started. Light emission control is performed to make 38 and 38 emit light in rainbow colors. This rainbow-colored light emission control is continued until, for example, playback of the demo movie is started. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the company name video is a video that may be played during the jackpot game (for example, the end of the jackpot game), and even if it is played during the jackpot game, it has the same rainbow color as above. Light emission control is performed. In this way, by using the rainbow-colored light emission control that suggests that the jackpot is confirmed in the company name moving image during the jackpot game, the impression of the company name can be improved. In addition, by playing the company name video in the same manner as during the jackpot game during the customer waiting production, the player who saw the customer waiting production wants to remind the player of the good impression when the jackpot is played and play the game with the gaming machine 1. It is possible to make you think.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is "1" or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when the main CPU 101 executes the shift process following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 stores the earliest acquired information stored in the reserved storage area for the second special symbol determination in the determination storage area. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the upper position one entry at a time. The determination storage area is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the reserved storage area for the first special symbol determination is shifted to the determination storage area, and the rest. The acquired information is shifted to the upper level one entry at a time.

Following the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area (step S309). This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 36.

Following the process in step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S310). This fluctuation pattern determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information and the special symbol setting information determined in the process of step S309 are related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether the information is related, setting information of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S310, information on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like is set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbol 501 on the liquid crystal screen 5 is started.

Following the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S311 (step S312). At that time, if the processing of steps S309 to 311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area, the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Starts the variable display of. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S309 to 311 is performed in the state where the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the second special symbol display 42 starts the variable display of the special symbol. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

The main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of measurement of the variation time in step S313 when the process of step S313 is executed or when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step S302: YES). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. A symbol confirmation command for notifying that is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the decorative symbol 501, which has been variablely displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, is stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the special symbol determination.

Following the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) determined in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display which has been variablely displayed. The stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner, and then displays the special symbol showing the determination result of the jackpot determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the fluctuation time for which the measurement was started in the process of step S313 (step S318), and sets an opening command for starting the jackpot game when the jackpot is a jackpot. The stopped process including the above is executed (step S319). When this opening command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8 (see FIG. 31), the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 indicates, for example, the start of the opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot. The effect start command is set in the sub RAM 133. The opening effect (see FIG. 21 (H)) is started in response to the transmission of this opening effect start command to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 38).

[Big hit determination process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 35. The main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination based on a jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area (step S3091). Specifically, when the current gaming state is a low-probability state, the main CPU 101 reads a low-probability jackpot determination table (not shown) from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the high probability state, the main CPU 101 reads the high probability jackpot determination table (not shown) from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103. For example, in the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table, determination values to be compared with the jackpot random numbers are pre-assigned to jackpots or losses. In the main CPU 101, the value of the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S2102 in FIG. 33 (or the process of step S2202 in FIG. 34) matches any of the determination values defined in the jackpot determination table set in the main RAM 103. Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on whether or not it is a big hit.

Following the process of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the main ROM 102, and together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3091. The type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area together, and the setting information is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3093). By determining the type of jackpot symbol, the type of jackpot will be determined. Specifically, for example, when the symbol random number is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number of the main CPU 101 is defined in the symbol determination table (not shown) for the first starting port. The jackpot symbol is determined based on which judgment value matches. When the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 matches the symbol random number with any determination value specified in the symbol determination table for the second starting port (not shown). The jackpot design is decided based on whether or not it is done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 101 is not a big hit (step S3092: NO), the setting information of the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). As a result, in the process of step S317, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed. With the above, the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG. 36.

[Variation pattern determination process by game control board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern determination process in step S310 of FIG. 35. First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3091 is a big hit (step S3101). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3101: YES), the jackpot variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102). The variation pattern table is a table in which a variation pattern of a special symbol and a determination value for comparison with a variation pattern random number are associated with each other, and is a table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 for each gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 101 is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), that is, when it is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined from the fluctuation pattern of a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) or less. Whether or not it is determined (step S3103). Specifically, in the main CPU 101, the value of the reach random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S3091 is the reach random number based on the number of pending special symbol determinations having the same winning start port. It is determined which of the determination values for comparison matches.

When the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol from the variation pattern exceeding a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) (step S3103: NO), the reach variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. (Step S3104). On the other hand, when determining from the fluctuation pattern of a specific number of seconds or less (step S3103: NO), the non-reach fluctuation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S3102, the process of step S3104, or the process of step S3105, determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, and determines the setting information. It is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines which of the determination values specified in the variation pattern table matches the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S3091. Based on, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 specially determines which of the determination values specified in the jackpot variation pattern table the variation pattern random number matches. Determine the variation pattern of the symbol. Further, for example, when the non-reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the number of holds after the shift process in step S308 based on the variation pattern random number. The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command together with the setting information of the special symbol set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process of step S309 described above, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. .. With the above, the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG. 37.

[Timer interrupt processing by the effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed on the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the effect control board 130. Hereinafter, the processes shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 will be described as being performed by the effect control board 130, but some or all of these processes are performed by the effect control board 130, the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150. It may be executed in any of the above.

The sub CPU 131 in the effect control board 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes exemplified in FIG. 38 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the same manner as the timer interrupt process performed in the game control board 100. The processes shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 are performed according to the instructions issued by the sub CPU 131 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132.

The sub CPU 131 first executes a command reception process (step S10) that performs a process according to a command from the game control board 100, and then executes a transmission process (step S30). In the command reception process, processing is performed according to the reception of various commands from the game control board 100 and the lamp control board 150. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 receives, for example, a command as game information from the game control board 100, and sets the effect content according to the received command. For example, the sub CPU 131 determines a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol, and determines whether or not the advance notice effect that can be executed in the determined variation effect pattern is executed and the content thereof. Then, the sub CPU 131 generates, for example, a command instructing the execution of the determined effect and transmits it to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. As a result, the effect of the content determined on the effect control board 130 is executed on the image / acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. The command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 39.

Following the process in step S30, the sub CPU 131 performs a data transfer process (step S50). The sub CPU 131, for example, receives data transmitted from the image / sound control board 140 in order to control the light emission of the frame lamp 37 or the like or control (for example, operate) the effect 7 or the like with the start of each effect. Transfer to the lamp control board 150. By performing this data transfer process, for example, light emission control is performed in which the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in conjunction with the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the effect sound output by the speaker 24. Or, the production accessory 7 is operated. With the above, the sub CPU 131 ends the process shown in FIG. 38.

[Command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 38. As illustrated in FIG. 39, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 or the lamp control board has been received (step S11). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command has been received (step S11: YES), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S2112 (see FIG. 33) or step S2212 (see FIG. 34). It is determined whether or not the command is a hold command (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S14, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the hold command reception process (step S13). In the hold command reception process, the sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an icon display command including setting information regarding the display mode of the hold icon 54 in the sub RAM 133. This hold command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S311 (see FIG. 35). It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S16, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the variation start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the variation start command reception process (step S15). In the variation start command reception process, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command by a lottery using the variation effect pattern random number. This fluctuation start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S14: NO), the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S316 (see FIG. 35). (Step S16). When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a symbol determination command (step S16: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the variation effect end command in the sub RAM 133 (step S17). This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30, so that the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 along with the stop display of the special symbol. It will be displayed as stopped.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol determination command (step S16: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S18). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. The operation command includes information indicating which of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 has been operated, and information indicating which key has been operated when the effect key 27 has been operated.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the operation command has been received (step S18: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the operation effect start command in the sub RAM 133 (step S19). This command is transmitted to the audiovisual control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S30. By receiving this command, the image / sound control board 140 can, for example, execute an image or sound effect using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the speaker 24 according to the operation during the valid period. Further, by receiving this command, the lamp control board 150 can execute an effect of causing various lamps to emit light according to the operation during the valid period.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not an operation command (step S18: NO), the sub CPU 131 ends the process shown in FIG. 39. Although not shown in the figure, when the sub CPU 131 determines that another command has been received in the command reception process, the sub CPU 131 executes the process according to the command. For example, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the customer waiting command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received, the sub CPU 131 starts measuring the waiting time (for example, 30 seconds). If the waiting time elapses without receiving the variable start command after that, the customer waiting effect start command instructing the start of the customer waiting effect is set in the sub RAM 133. Further, for example, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received, the sub CPU 131 sets an opening command instructing the start of the opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot.

[Hold command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 39. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 adds "1" to the number of holds for special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133, as illustrated in FIG. 40. It is updated to the value obtained (step S1311). Specifically, whether it is a hold command related to the first special symbol determination or a hold command related to the second special symbol determination based on the winning start opening information included in the advance judgment information in the hold command. Is determined, and based on the determination result, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination or the number of reservations related to the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Following the process of step S1311, the sub CPU 131 analyzes the prior determination information included in the received hold command, and stores the analysis result in the sub RAM 133 (step S1312).

Next, the sub CPU 131 acquires the effect control random numbers such as the hold icon change effect execution random number and the mode random number, and the hold icon change effect (gase) execution random number and the mode random number, and stores them in the sub RAM 133 (step S1313 and). Step S1314). The execution random number for the hold icon change effect is a random number for determining whether or not the hold icon change effect is executed, and the hold icon change effect mode random number is the mode at the time of winning the hold icon and the subsequent change pattern (hereinafter,). It is a random number for determining), which is sometimes referred to simply as a "change pattern". Further, the execution random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) is a random number for determining whether or not the hold icon change effect (gase) is executed, and the mode random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) is the hold icon change effect. It is a random number for determining the mode of the icon change image according to (Gase).

In the present embodiment, the case where the random number is a random number updated by the effect control board 130 and is a random number acquired when a hold command is received from the game control board 100 will be described. The timing of acquiring the above random numbers is not limited to the time when the hold command is received. For example, the random number may be acquired when it is determined that the hold icon change effect can be executed (when YES is determined in the process of step S1315 described later). Further, for example, when determining the change pattern of the hold icon change effect, the hold icon change effect mode random number may be acquired.

Following the process of step S1314, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the hold icon change effect can be executed (step S1315). For example, when the setting information of the hold icon change effect is already set in the sub RAM 133, or when the jackpot game is in progress, it is determined that the hold icon change effect cannot be executed. When it is determined that the hold icon change effect cannot be executed (step S1315: NO), the process proceeds to step S1321.

In the present embodiment, when the hold icon change effect (gase) or the setting information of the icon change effect (gase) is already set in the sub RAM 133, the hold icon change effect can be executed. It is judged.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the hold icon change effect can be executed (step S1315: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (step S1316). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a hold icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the pre-determination information corresponding to the current hold command (that is, corresponding to the look-ahead target), and the hold icon change effect execution random number acquired in the process of step S1313, the hold icon change effect is performed. Decide whether to execute.

In the hold icon change effect execution lottery table, for example, among the judgment results that the judgment value compared with the execution random number for the hold icon change effect "executes" the hold icon change effect and the judgment result that "does not execute". It is a table pre-allocated to either one. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect based on which determination result the execution random number for the hold icon change effect matches the determination value assigned to which determination result.

For example, when "0 to 99" is set as a judgment value to be compared with the execution random number for holding icon change effect, the judgment value to be compared when the pre-judgment information indicates a big hit is "execute". "0 to 39" is assigned to the judgment result (execution rate 40%), and "40 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "do not execute" (execution rate 60%). ). On the other hand, as the judgment value to be compared when the pre-judgment information shows a loss, "0 to 29" is assigned to the judgment result of "execute" (execution ratio 30%), and "do not execute". "30-99" is assigned to the determination result of "" (ratio of non-execution 70%).

As described above, the hold icon change effect is more likely to be executed when the look-ahead target is a big hit than when it is a loss. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the case where the hold icon change effect is executed has higher reliability than the case where the hold icon change effect is not executed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the hold icon change effect is to be executed (step S1316: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines the hold icon change pattern (step S1317). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a holding icon mode determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, the change pattern of the hold icon is determined based on the table, the current number of special 1 hold, the pre-determination information corresponding to the look-ahead target, and the hold icon change effect mode random number acquired in the process of step S1313. , Is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the hold icon change effect. An example of the determination ratio is as described above with reference to FIG. 27.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 stores the current reserved number of the first special symbol determination in the fluctuation number counter stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1318). The fluctuation count counter is a variable for counting the number of hold of the first special symbol determination until the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target of the hold icon change effect is executed.

If NO is determined in the process of step S1316, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (gase) (step S1319). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a hold icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (gase) based on the table, the pre-judgment information corresponding to the look-ahead target, and the execution random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1314. To decide.

In the hold icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table, for example, the judgment result that the judgment value to be compared with the execution random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) "executes" the hold icon change effect (gase) and "execution". It is a table pre-allocated to any of the determination results of "No". The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (gase) based on which determination result the execution random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) matches the determination value assigned to. For example, in the above table, it is set in advance so that the rate of determination to be executed is higher when the preliminary determination information indicates a big hit than when it indicates a loss.

In this way, the hold icon change effect (gase) is more difficult to execute when the look-ahead target is a big hit than when it is a loss. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reliability is lower when the hold icon change effect (gase) is executed than when it is not executed.

If YES is determined in the process of step S1319, the sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the hold icon change effect (gase) (step S1320). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a hold icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, the mode of the hold icon change effect (gase) is determined based on the table, the pre-determination information corresponding to the look-ahead target, and the mode random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1314. It is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the hold icon change effect (gase).

In the hold icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table, for example, the judgment value to be compared with the hold icon change effect (gase) mode random number is "blue", "green", and "red". Each is a pre-allocated table. The sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the hold icon change effect (gase) based on which determination result the random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) matches the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, it is preset so that it is easier to determine blue and less likely to determine green and red when the preliminary determination information indicates a loss than when it indicates a big hit.

When the sub CPU 131 executes step S1320, executes step S1318, or determines NO in the process of step S1319, the sub CPU 131 sets the icon display command in the sub RAM 133 (step S1321). The icon display command includes advance determination information obtained based on the hold command, winning start opening information, and the like, and includes these setting information when the process of step S1317 or step S1320 is executed. This icon display command is transmitted to the image / acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process (see FIG. 38) in step S30. As a result, the effect that the hold icon is displayed in the mode determined on the effect control board 130 and the start port lamp 38 emits light in the emission color corresponding to the displayed hold icon is produced by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp. It will be realized by the control board 150.

[Variation start command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the variation start command reception process executed on the effect control board 130 in response to the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. 39.

As illustrated in FIG. 39, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is the variation start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 acquires the variation effect pattern random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133. (Step S151). The sub CPU 131 such as the variation effect pattern random number acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received as the variation effect pattern random number.

Following the process of step S151, the sub CPU 131 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the game control board 100 (step S152). As described above, the variation start command includes information on whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot that indicates the determination result of the jackpot determination (see FIG. 36), the type of the special symbol, the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Information and the like indicating the above are included. By performing this process, the sub CPU 131 obtains the information necessary for determining the variation effect pattern.

Following the process of step S152, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, whether or not it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination (see FIG. 36) based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (step S153).

In the case of a jackpot (step S153: YES), the sub CPU 131 reads a jackpot variation effect pattern table (not shown) according to the current gaming state from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S154).

In the variable effect pattern table, one or a plurality of types of variable effect patterns are associated in advance with respect to whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit symbol and the combination of the variable pattern of the special symbol. It's a table. In the sub ROM 132, for example, a variation effect pattern table for a normal gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state is stored in advance.

For example, in the variable effect pattern table for big hits, which is set according to the normal game state, a hit notification is performed by matching the symbols at the end of any of the reach effects according to the flow of the variable effect as described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 13. The variation effect pattern is associated with it.

If NO is determined in the process of step S153, that is, if there is a loss, the sub CPU 131 can select, for example, a variation effect pattern capable of executing the reach effect based on the analysis result of the variation start command. Is determined (step S155). When the sub CPU 131 determines YES in the process of step S155, the sub CPU 131 sets the variation effect pattern table with reach (not shown) according to the current gaming state in the sub RAM 133 (step S156). For example, in the variable effect pattern table for reach, which is set according to the normal gaming state, the loss notification by the reach loss eye is sent at the end of any of the reach effects due to the flow of the variable effect as described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 13. The variation effect pattern to be performed is associated.

If NO is determined in the process of step S155, the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect pattern table for no reach (not shown) according to the current gaming state in the sub RAM 133 (step S157). For example, in the variation effect pattern table for no reach, which is set according to the normal game state, there is a variation effect pattern in which the reach is not established and the loss notification is performed due to the looseness due to the flow of the effect as described with reference to FIG. It is associated.

When the process of step S157 is executed, the process of step S154 is executed, or the process of step S156 is executed, the sub CPU 131 determines one variation effect pattern (step S158).

For example, when the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a variable effect pattern table according to the normal gaming state is set in the process of step S154, step S156, or step S157. In such a case, in the process of step S158, any one of the variable effect patterns for realizing the effect as described with reference to FIG. 13 is determined.

Following the process of step S158, the sub CPU 131 executes a final stop symbol determination process for determining a temporary stop display and a decorative symbol 501 (and a small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed (step S159). The final stop symbol determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42.

Following the process of step S159, the sub CPU 131 executes a notice effect pattern determination process for determining the setting content of the icon change effect (step S160). The advance notice effect pattern determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43.

Following the process of step S160, the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect start command including information indicating the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S158 and information indicating the setting contents determined in the processes of steps S159 and S160. (Step S161). The variation effect start command is transmitted to the image / acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process (see FIG. 38) in step S30. As a result, the variation effect of the mode determined in the effect control board 130 is realized by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Following the process of step S161, the sub CPU 131 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of holds stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S162). With the above, the sub CPU 131 ends the process shown in FIG. 41.

[Final stop symbol determination processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the final stop symbol determination process in step S159 of FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 42, the sub CPU 131 is, for example, a random number for effect control updated by the random number circuit 135 of the effect control board 130, and is a decoration that is stopped and displayed in association with the temporary stop display and the stop display of the special symbol. Various random numbers used for determining the symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) are acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1711).

In the present embodiment, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped or stopped in the same combination as the temporary stop display and the decorative symbol 501 that is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the following description with reference to FIG. 42, only the decorative symbol 501 will be described, and the description of the small symbol 502 will be omitted.

It should be noted that the small symbol 502 having a different combination from the decorative symbol 501 may be stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol. For example, in the case of a big hit, the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed in a mode including a special symbol, while the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination (for example, a random eye) to notify the big hit. May be good. In such a case, the combination of the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped (and temporarily stopped) and the combination of the small symbols 502 correspond to the type of jackpot, and the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped (and temporarily stopped) is displayed. The combination of the small symbol 502 and the small symbol 502 may have a one-to-one correspondence.

In the present embodiment, for example, the sub CPU 131 includes an odd / even random number, a stop symbol random number for a big hit, a promotion random number, a temporary stop symbol random number for a big hit, a symbol random number for reach loss, a decorative symbol random number for the left, a decorative symbol random number for the right, and a middle use. Get a decorative pattern random number.

The odd-even-numbered random numbers are random numbers for determining whether to use odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols. The jackpot stop symbol random number is a random number for determining the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed in the manner of matching the symbols. The promoted random number is a random number for determining whether or not to change from an even-numbered symbol alignment to an odd-numbered symbol alignment through the revariation effect. The temporary stop symbol random number for big hit is a medium decorative symbol 501B (that is, with the start of the victory effect) that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the victory effect when changing from the even number symbol alignment to the odd number symbol alignment via the revariation effect. It is a random number for determining the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) of the even-numbered symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed. The reach loss symbol random number is a random number of a combination of decorative symbols 501 (for example, for determining the reach symbol) at the time of loss notification in the reach effect. The decorative symbol random number for the left, the decorative symbol random number for the right, and the decorative symbol random number for the middle are random numbers for determining the combination of the decorative symbols 501 (for example, the random number) when the loss notification is performed without executing the reach effect. be.

The timing of acquiring the various random numbers is not limited to the above, and is, for example, when receiving a variation start command from the game control board 100 (immediately before the execution of step S151), when acquiring the variation effect pattern random number (when executing step S151). Alternatively, it may be acquired at the time of analyzing the fluctuation start command (at the time of executing step S152).

Following the process of step S1711, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination (see FIG. 36) based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (step S1712).

When it is determined to be a jackpot (step S1712: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not it is a jackpot symbol indicating a 6R probability variation or a 16R probability variation (that is, a probability variation hit) (step S1713). If YES is determined in the process of step S1713, the sub CPU 131 determines the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed in the mode of symbol alignment as one of odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols (that is, 1 to 9 symbols) (that is, 1 symbol to 9 symbols). Step S1714). For example, the sub CPU 131 first sets an odd / even lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table and the odd / even random numbers acquired in the process of step S1711, it is determined whether the odd symbol alignment or the even symbol alignment is used.

The odd / even lottery table is, for example, a table pre-assigned to either a judgment result that the judgment value to be compared with the odd / even random number is "to make an odd symbol" or a judgment result that "to make an even symbol". Is. The sub CPU 131 determines whether the odd-numbered symbol alignment or the even-numbered symbol alignment is to be obtained based on which determination result the odd / even random number matches the determination value assigned to.

For example, when "0 to 99" is set as a judgment value to be compared with an odd even random number, "0 to 98" is assigned to the judgment result of "making an odd symbol" (decision ratio). 99%), "99" is assigned to the judgment result of "make an even numbered symbol" (decision ratio 1%). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a probability variation hit, the odd-numbered symbols are more likely to be stopped and displayed than the even-numbered symbols.

Subsequently, the jackpot stop symbol lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 is set in the sub RAM 133. Then, the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed is displayed based on the table, the determination result of which of the odd-numbered symbol alignment and the even-numbered symbol alignment, and the jackpot stop symbol random number acquired in the process of step S1711. decide.

In the jackpot stop symbol lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the jackpot stop symbol random number is one of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 symbols corresponding to the case where odd-numbered symbols are aligned. It is assigned in advance to the determination result corresponding to the symbol. Further, in the case of matching even-numbered symbols, in the jackpot stop symbol lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the jackpot stop symbol random number is any one of 2, 4, 6, and 8. It is assigned in advance to the determination result corresponding to the symbol. The sub CPU 131 determines the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed based on which determination result the random number of the stop symbol for big hit matches the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, all the symbols are preset so as to be determined at the same ratio.

Following the process of step S1714, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to promote the symbol through the revariation effect (step S1715). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a promotion lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table and the promotion random number acquired in the process of step S1711, it is determined whether or not to promote the symbol. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is determined to be an even number in the process of step S1714, it is determined to be NO in the process of step S1715, and when it is determined to be an odd symbol, it is determined whether or not to promote.

The promotion lottery table is, for example, a table pre-assigned to either a determination result that the determination value to be compared with the promotion random number is "promoted" or a determination result that "not promoted". The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not promotion is performed based on which determination result the promotion random number matches the determination value assigned to. For example, in the above table, the ratios of promotion and non-promotion are set to be about the same.

By setting in advance in this way, even if even-numbered symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed with the start of the winning effect, a probable change can be expected. It is possible to give to a person.

If YES is determined in the process of step S1715, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, the decorative symbol 501 to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the start of the winning effect from the even-numbered symbols (step S1716). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a temporary stop symbol lottery table for big hits (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table and the random number of the temporary stop symbol for big hit acquired in the process of step S1716, the even symbol to be temporarily stopped is determined.

The jackpot temporary stop symbol lottery table is pre-assigned to, for example, a determination result in which the determination value to be compared with the jackpot temporary stop symbol random number corresponds to any of 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols. It's a table. The sub CPU 131 determines an even-numbered symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed based on which determination result the random number of the temporary stop symbol for big hit matches the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, all the symbols are preset so as to be determined at the same ratio.

If NO is determined in the process of step S1713, the sub CPU 131 determines the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed in the mode of symbol alignment as any of the even symbols (step S1717). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a jackpot stop symbol lottery table (not shown) in the sub RAM 133. Then, referring to the part corresponding to the case where the even-numbered symbols of the table are aligned, the even-numbered symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined based on which judgment result the random number of the stop symbol for big hit matches the judgment value assigned to which judgment result. do. As described above, in the present embodiment, even-numbered symbols are always stopped and displayed in the case of a time saving hit.

Although not shown in the figure, in the case of the variation effect pattern related to the resurrection hit, the sub CPU 131 determines the reach loss eye to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the loss notification. Specifically, when NO is determined in the process of step S1715, when the process of step S1716 is executed, or when the process of step S1717 is executed, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the start of the winning effect is lost. While the reach symbol is determined to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification, the decorative symbol 501 corresponding to the number obtained by subtracting (or adding) a predetermined value (for example, 1) from the number indicated by the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the loss notification. The decorative pattern 501B is determined.

When NO is determined in the process of step S1712, that is, in the case of loss, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, whether or not the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S158 is a variable effect pattern capable of executing reach effect (. Step S1718). If YES is determined in the process of step S1718, the sub CPU 131 determines the combination of the decorative symbols 501 of the reach loss eyes (step S1719).

For example, the sub ROM 132 stores in advance a reach loss table (not shown) in which determination values for comparison with the reach loss decorative symbol random numbers acquired in the process of step S1711 are assigned to the 1st to 9th symbols. .. The sub CPU 131 refers to the reach loss table (not shown), and determines the decorative symbol to which the determination value matching the value of the reach loss decorative symbol random number is assigned as the reach symbol constituting the reach loss eye. Then, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the number obtained by subtracting (or adding) a predetermined value (for example, 1) from the number indicated by the decorative symbol constituting the reach symbol is determined as the medium decorative symbol 501B constituting the reach loss eye. As a result, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the lost notification by the reach lost eye is realized.

In the reach loss table, for example, by reducing the number of determination values assigned to the 7 symbols, the ratio of the 7 symbols determined as the reach symbols constituting the reach loss eyes is relatively low. It may be set in advance. Alternatively, by equalizing the number of determination values assigned to each of the 1st to 9th symbols, any of the 1st to 9th decorative symbols is determined as the reach symbol constituting the reach loss stitch. The ratio may be set in advance so as to be the same.

If NO is determined in the process of step S1718, the sub CPU 131 determines the combination of the decorative symbols 501 of the loose stitches (step S1720). For example, in the sub ROM 132, the determination value for comparison with the left decorative symbol random number acquired in the process of step S1711 is assigned to the 1st to 9th symbols, and the left symbol table is compared with the right decorative symbol random number. The table for the right symbol to which the judgment value of 1 is assigned to the symbols 1 to 9 and the table for the middle symbol to which the determination value for comparison with the random number of the decorative symbol for medium is assigned to the symbols 1 to 9 are stored in advance. (Not shown). The sub CPU 131 refers to these tables and matches the decorative symbol to the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol random number to which the determination value matching the left decorative symbol random number is assigned so as not to cause the symbol alignment and reach loss. The decorative symbol to which the determination value is assigned is determined as the right decorative symbol 501C, and the decorative symbol to which the determination value matching the medium decorative symbol random number is assigned is determined as the intermediate decorative symbol 501B.

The random number for determining the temporary stop display and the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed may be any random number, and may be determined by using, for example, a variable effect pattern random number.

[Preliminary effect pattern determination process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern determination process in step S160 of FIG. 41. In the process illustrated in FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, and the content of the effects when they are executed. In the following description with reference to FIG. 43, only the cut-in effect, the button effect, the icon change effect, and the icon change effect (gase) will be described, and the description of the mini character effect and the pseudo-continuous effect will be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 43, the sub CPU 131 generates a random number for effect control for determining setting information of each notice effect such as a cut-in effect, a button effect, the icon change effect, and the icon change effect (gase). It is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1811). Specifically, the sub CPU 131 is, for example, a cut-in effect random number, a button effect random number, an icon change effect execution random number / mode random number / timing random number, and an icon change effect (gase) execution random number / mode. Acquire random numbers and timing random numbers for icon change effect (gase).

The cut-in effect mode random number is a random number for determining the cut-in effect mode. The mode random number for button effect is a random number for determining the mode of button effect. The execution random number, mode random number, and timing random number for the icon change effect are a random number for determining whether or not the icon change effect is executed, a random number for determining the mode of the icon change effect, and execution of the icon change effect. It is a random number for determining the timing. Further, the execution random number / mode random number for the icon change effect (gase) is a random number for determining whether or not the icon change effect (gase) is executed, and a mode for determining the mode of the icon change effect (gase), respectively. It is a random number. Further, the timing random number for the icon change effect (gase) is a random number for determining the execution timing of the icon change effect (gase) or the hold icon change effect (gase).

Following the process of step S1811, the sub CPU 131 acquires the hold icon change effect timing random number (one of the effect control random numbers) and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1812). This random number is a random number for determining at which timing during the variable effect to be started this time the hold icon change effect is executed.

The timing of acquiring various random numbers acquired in the processes of steps S1811 and S1812 is not limited to the above, and for example, when the variation start command is received from the game control board 100 (immediately before the execution of step S151), the variation effect pattern random numbers It may be at the time of acquisition (at the time of executing step S151) or the like. Alternatively, a variable effect pattern random number may be used in the random number lottery that determines the mode of each advance notice effect.

Following the process of step S1812, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S158 is a variable effect pattern capable of executing SPSP reach 1 (step S1813). If YES is determined in the process of step S1813, the sub CPU 131 determines by lottery whether or not to set the mode of the cut-in effect executed during SPSP reach 1 (during the battle) to the premier cut-in. The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a cut-in mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the variation effect pattern, and the cut-in effect mode random number acquired in the process of step S1811, it is determined whether or not the cut-in effect mode is set to the premier cut-in.

The cut-in mode lottery table is pre-assigned to, for example, either a judgment result that the judgment value to be compared with the cut-in mode random number is "premier cut-in" or a judgment result that "other than the premier cut-in". It is a table that has been set. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the premier cut-in based on which determination result the random number for the cut-in effect mode matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect of each aspect is executed at the ratio illustrated in FIG. 15 (C). For example, when "0 to 99" is set as a judgment value to be compared with the random number for the cut-in effect, the determination result of "premier cut-in" is "premier cut-in" corresponding to the direct hit variation effect pattern. "0,1" is assigned (decision rate 2%), and "2 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "other than the premier cut-in" (premier cut-in execution rate 2%). In addition, "0" is assigned to the judgment result of "premier cut-in" corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern per revival (decision ratio 1%), and the judgment result of "other than premier cut-in" On the other hand, "1 to 99" is assigned (premier cut-in execution rate 1%). In addition, the judgment value is not assigned to the judgment result of "premier cut-in" corresponding to the variation effect pattern for loss, and "0 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "other than premier cut-in". Is assigned (premier cut-in execution rate 0%). In the present embodiment, when the mode of the cut-in effect is determined to be other than the premier cut-in, the cut-in effect is determined to correspond to the variable effect pattern.

Following the process of step S1814, the sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the button effect by lottery. The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a button mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, the mode of the button effect is determined based on the table, the variation effect pattern, and the random number for the button effect mode acquired in the process of step S1811.

In the button mode lottery table, for example, the judgment value to be compared with the button mode random number is one of three judgment results of "weak button effect", "strong button effect", and "premier button effect". It is a table pre-allocated to. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the premier cut-in based on which determination result the random number for the button effect matches the determination value assigned to.

In the present embodiment, the button effect of each aspect is determined at the ratio illustrated in FIG. 16 (F). As an example, when "0 to 99" is set as a judgment value to be compared with the random number for the button effect, the determination result of "weak button effect" is "weak button effect" corresponding to the direct hit variation effect pattern. "0-45" is assigned (decision rate 46%), and "47-97" is assigned to the judgment result of "strong button effect" (decision rate 52%), "premier button effect". "98,99" is assigned to the judgment result of (decision rate 2%). In addition, the ratios shown in the columns of "Resurrection hit in battle" and "Defeat in battle (reach loss)" in FIG. 16F, respectively, correspond to the fluctuation production pattern per revival and the fluctuation production pattern for loss, respectively. A judgment value is assigned to each judgment result.

When the process of step S1815 is executed, or when NO is determined in the process of step S1813, the sub CPU 131 produces a hold icon change effect, for example, because the process of step S1317 (see FIG. 40) is executed in the sub RAM 133. It is determined whether or not the setting information of is stored (step S1816). If NO is determined in the process of step S1816, the process proceeds to step S1819.

If YES is determined in the process of step S1816, the sub CPU 131 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter and determines the execution timing of the hold icon change effect by lottery (step S1817 and step S1818). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an icon change timing lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the variation effect pattern, and the hold icon change effect timing random number acquired in the process of step S1811, the hold icon related to the look-ahead target is changed to the mode indicated by the setting information of the hold icon change effect. Hold icon Determines the execution timing of the change effect.

In the icon change timing lottery table, for example, one or a plurality of timings at which the icon change effect can be executed corresponding to each variation effect pattern are predetermined (see, for example, FIG. 30). Then, a determination value to be compared with the timing random number for effecting the hold icon change is assigned in advance to any of the timings. The sub CPU 131 determines the execution timing of the hold icon change effect based on which determination result the random number matches the timing assigned to. When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1818, the sub CPU 131 proceeds to step S161.

If NO is determined in step S1816, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (step S1819). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, the icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the information on whether or not it is a big hit, and the execution random number for the icon change effect acquired in the process of step S1811, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect.

In the icon change effect execution lottery table, for example, among the determination results that the determination value compared with the execution random number for the icon change effect "executes" the icon change effect and the determination result that "does not execute". It is a table pre-allocated to either one. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on which determination result the execution random number for the icon change effect matches the determination value assigned to which determination result.

For example, when "0 to 99" is set as a judgment value to be compared with the execution random number for the icon change effect, the judgment value to be compared in the case of a big hit is the judgment result of "execute". "0 to 39" is assigned (percentage of execution 40%), and "40 to 99" is assigned to the determination result of "do not execute" (ratio of not executing 60%). On the other hand, as the judgment value to be compared in the case of loss, "0 to 29" is assigned to the judgment result of "execute" (execution ratio 30%), and the judgment result of "do not execute". "30-99" is assigned to (70% of non-execution).

In this way, the icon change effect is easier to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit than when the icon change effect is lost. Therefore, when the icon change effect is executed, the reliability is higher than when the icon change effect is not executed. Can be recognized by a person.

If YES is determined in the process of step S1819, the sub CPU 131 determines the final aspect of the icon and its change pattern (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “change pattern”) (step S1820, step S1821). .. The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an icon mode determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, the change pattern of the icon is determined based on the table, the variation effect pattern, and the mode random number for the icon change effect acquired in the process of step S1811, and the change pattern of the icon is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect. do. An example of the determination ratio is as described above with reference to FIG. When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1821, the sub CPU 131 proceeds to step S161.

If NO is determined in the process of step S1819, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (gase) (step S1822). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, the icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, information on whether or not it is a big hit, and the execution random number for the icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1811, whether or not to execute the icon change effect (gase) is determined. decide.

In the icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table, for example, the determination result that the determination value compared with the execution random number for the icon change effect (gase) "executes" the icon change effect (gase) and "execution". It is a table pre-allocated to any of the determination results of "No". The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (gase) based on which determination result the execution random number for the icon change effect (gase) matches the determination value assigned to. For example, the icon change effect (gase) is set in advance so that it is more difficult to execute when it is a big hit than when it is a loss. As a result, the player can recognize that the reliability is lower when the icon change effect (gase) is executed than when it is not executed.

If YES is determined in the process of step S1822, the sub CPU 131 determines by lottery which mode the icon change effect (gase) suggesting the change is to be executed (step S1824). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, the icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, the mode of the icon change effect (gase) is determined based on the table, information on whether or not it is a big hit, and the mode random number for the icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1811.

In the icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the icon change effect (gase) mode random number is "blue", "green", and "red". Each is a pre-allocated table. The sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the icon change effect (gase) based on which determination result the random number for the icon change effect (gase) matches the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, it is preset so that the case of loss is more likely to be determined to be blue and less likely to be determined to be green and red than the case of big hit.

If NO is determined in the process of step S1822, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the setting information of the hold icon change effect (gase) is stored due to the execution of the process of step S1320 (see FIG. 40). (Step S1823). If YES is determined in the process of step S1823, or if the process of step S1824 is executed, the sub CPU 131 sets the icon change timing lottery table (not shown) in the sub RAM 133, and the table and the variation effect pattern. And the timing random number for the icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1811, the execution timing of the icon change effect (gase) or the hold icon change effect (gase) is determined.

If the process of step S1825 is executed, or if NO is determined in the process of step S1823, the sub CPU 131 advances the process to step S161.

The process illustrated in FIG. 43 is only an example, and any method may be used to determine the mode of the advance notice effect. For example, the mode of each notice effect may be determined by one random number lottery.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image / sound control board 140]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed on the image / acoustic control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the image / acoustic control board 140. The image / sound control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 44 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. do.

First, the control CPU 141 of the image / acoustic control board 140 determines whether or not the variable effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 is received in response to the process of step S161 (see FIG. 41) (step S501).

When it is determined that the variation effect start command has been received (step S501: YES), the control CPU 141 is based on the setting information regarding the variation effect included in the received variation effect start command and the program stored in the control ROM 142. A control signal is generated, and the generated control signal is output to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145 to start the variation effect (step S502). Further, for example, if the command is a variable effect start command for instructing the execution of the button effect, the control CPU 141 sets the setting information (valid period of the effect button 26, etc.) related to the execution in the control RAM 145.

When the control CPU 141 has executed the process of step S502, or has determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (step S5011: NO), has the effect control board 130 received the variation effect end command? It is determined whether or not (step S503). When it is determined that the control CPU 141 has received the variation effect end command (step S503: YES), the control CPU 141 ends the variation effect (step S504).

When the control CPU 141 executes the process of step S504 or determines that the variable effect end command has not been received (step S503: NO), it determines whether or not the button effect is in progress (step S505).

If YES is determined in the process of step S505, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the operation effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S506). Here, if it is determined that the operation effect start command has not been received (step S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S509.

When it is determined that the operation effect start command has been received (step S506: YES), the centralized CPU 141 has, for example, in the effect control board 130 among the loss suggestion and the hit operation effect described with reference to FIG. 13 (o). One of the effects whose execution is determined in advance at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol 501 is executed (step S507). As a result, for example, a process of executing a hit operation effect in response to an operation during the premier button effect is realized.

On the other hand, if NO is determined in the process of step S505, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the button effect (step S508). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (step S508: YES), the process proceeds to step S507. As a result, a process or the like in which the hit operation effect is executed is realized in response to the end of the effective period without operating the effect button 26 during the effective period related to the premier button effect.

When the control CPU 141 executes the process of step S507, determines NO in the process of step S506, or determines NO in the process of step S508, has the icon display command transmitted from the effect control board 130 been received? It is determined whether or not (step S509). When the control CPU 141 determines that the icon display command has been received (step S509: YES), the control CPU 141 sets the icon display control setting information included in the command, such as the setting information for the icon change effect, in the control RAM 145, and sets the setting. The icon display control based on the information is executed (step S510, step S511).

When the control CPU 141 executes the process of step S511 or determines that the icon display command has not been received (step S509: NO), the control CPU 141 executes the data transmission control process (step S509). Specifically, the integrated CPU 141 transmits data related to image / acoustic control performed on the image / acoustic control board 140 to the effect control board 130.

On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image / sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are emitted by the lamp control board 150 and the effect 7 is operated so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Timer interrupt processing by the lamp control board 150]
Next, the timer interrupt processing performed on the lamp control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed on the lamp control board 150. The lamp control board 150 transmits a command from the effect control board 130 and a command from the effect control board 130 from the image / sound control board 140 during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power supply is started or when the power is turned off. A series of processes illustrated in FIG. 45 is repeatedly executed at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the data regarding the audiovisual control.

First, the lamp CPU 151 receives data related to image acoustic control transmitted from the image acoustic control board 140 via the effect control board 130 and data transmitted from the effect control board 130 (for example, an operation effect start command). The process is executed (step S601). Subsequently, the lamp CPU 151 sets a light emission pattern and an operation pattern specified by the data received by the process of step S601 in the lamp RAM 153 (step S602), and executes light emission control and operation control based on the pattern (step S603). ).

Following the process of step S603, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the effect button 26 has been operated (step S604). When it is determined that the operation has not been performed (step S604: NO), the lamp CPU 151 ends the process shown in FIG. 45.

When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the effect button 26 has been operated (step S604: YES), the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated to the effect control board 130 (step S605), and is shown in FIG. 45. End the process.

[Modification example]
The present invention is, for example, a type of gaming machine that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state immediately after the end of a jackpot game without winning a V during a jackpot game, a type 1 type 2 type mixed type gaming machine, a rotating body type gaming machine, and a slot machine. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as.

Any input means may be used. As the input means, for example, a touch panel which is a display screen on which the player can input operation information by performing a touch operation with a finger may be provided. Further, an optical sensor or the like provided in the frame member 3 may be used as an input means so that the player can input the operation information by touching the glass plate.

It should be noted that a part of the processing executed by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 may be executed by the effect control board 130, or a part of the process executed by the effect control board 130 may be performed by the image / sound control board 140. Alternatively, it may be executed by the lamp control board 150. Further, any of the effect control board 130, the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be integrally configured, and as an example, the processing executed by the effect control board 130 and the image / sound control board 150. May be executed on one control board.

Further, it is needless to say that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the light emitting mode and operating mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations, light emitting modes, and operating modes. stomach. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The explanatory diagrams and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other embodiments.

The above-mentioned effect is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Further, the above embodiments and modifications are applicable to each other, and the present invention may be realized in various combinations.

[Structure and Action / Effect of Pachinko Gaming Machine According to the Present Invention]
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may have the following configuration.

The gaming machine (for example, 1) according to the embodiment is
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to C) and
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to have a predetermined effect means (for example, 5) execute a notification effect (for example, display of a premier cut-in image) for notifying that the special game is executed during the variable display of the symbol.
Along with the start of the notification effect, the light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a specific light emission color (for example, rainbow color) is started, and the light emission effect is ended after the notification effect is finished.

According to such a configuration, with the start of the notification effect, the light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color is started. By making the execution time longer for the light emitting effect than for the notification effect, the light emitting effect is continued even after the notification effect is completed. Thereby, by making the light emitting means emit light with a specific light emitting color, it is possible to give power at the start of the notification effect and to make it easier for the player to grasp that the notification effect has been started.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to C) and
An effect sound output means (for example, 24) capable of outputting an effect sound, an image display means (for example, 5) for displaying an image, and
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed during the variable display of the symbol.
The notification effect is
A first notification effect (for example, output of a premier cut-in sound) that outputs a specific effect sound from the effect sound output means, and
The image display means includes a second notification effect (for example, display of a premier cut-in image) for displaying a specific effect image.
Along with the start of the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a specific light emission color (for example, rainbow color) is started, and after the first notification effect is completed, the first notification effect is completed. 2 The notification effect is ended, and then the light emission effect is ended.

According to such a configuration, the light emission effect can be started with the start of the first notification effect and the second notification effect. Further, by increasing the execution time of each effect in the order of the execution time of the first notification effect <execution time of the second notification effect <execution time of the light emission effect, the end timing of each effect can be made different. As a result, it is possible to give power at the start of the first notification effect and the second notification effect, and it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the notification effect has been executed. Further, since the light emitting effect is continued even after the first notification effect and the second notification effect are completed, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the first notification effect and the second notification effect have been executed. Is.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Light emitting means (for example, 25A, 25B) capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
During the variable display of the symbol, a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed (for example, display of a rainbow-colored effect image related to the premier character D in the icon change effect suggesting a change to the premiere) is performed. It is possible to have a predetermined effect means (for example, 5) perform the execution.
Along with the start of the notification effect, a light emission effect (for example, rainbow-colored light emission of 25A and 25B in the icon change effect suggesting a change to the premier) is started to cause the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color, and the light emission is performed. After finishing the production, the notification production is finished.

According to such a configuration, with the start of the notification effect, the light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color is started. By lengthening the execution time of the notification effect rather than the light emission effect, the notification effect is continued even after the light emission effect is completed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the notification effect has been executed with a force at the start of the notification effect by causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific emission color.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Light emitting means (for example, 25A, 25B) capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a pre-determination means (for example, S2109, S2209) that determines in advance whether or not to execute the special game based on the game information,
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
A notification effect (for example, a premier character D in a hold icon change effect suggesting a change to a premiere) for notifying that the special game is determined to be executed by the pre-determination means over a plurality of variable displays of the symbols. It is possible to have a predetermined effect means (for example, 5) execute the display of the rainbow-colored effect image according to the above.
Along with the start of the notification effect, a light emission effect (for example, rainbow-colored light emission of 25A and 25B in the hold icon change effect suggesting a change to the premiere) is started to emit light in a specific light emission color, and the light emission is performed. After finishing the production, the notification production is finished.

According to such a configuration, before the start of the variable display of the symbol, the light emitting effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emitting color is started with the start of the notification effect. By lengthening the execution time of the notification effect rather than the light emission effect, the notification effect is continued even after the light emission effect is completed. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the notification effect has been executed with force at the start of the notification effect by causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific emission color before the variable display of the above symbol is started. It is possible.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to C) and
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect (for example, SPSP reach) in which the special game is expected to be executed during the variable display of the symbol.
It is possible to have a predetermined effect means (for example, 5) execute a notification effect (for example, display of a premier cut-in image) for notifying that the special game is executed during the variable display of the symbol.
During the reach effect, the light emitting means is made to emit light with a predetermined light emitting color (for example, other than rainbow color) corresponding to the reach effect.
When the notification effect is executed during the reach effect, the light emitting means is made to emit light with a specific emission color (for example, rainbow color) different from the predetermined emission color with the start of the notification effect (for example, 25A). , 25B, 37A to C are emitted in rainbow colors.).

According to such a configuration, since the light emitting means emits light with a predetermined light emitting color corresponding to the reach effect during the reach effect, it is possible to improve the effect of the reach effect. When the notification effect is executed during the reach effect, the light emission control corresponding to the notification effect is prioritized, so that the notification effect can be emphasized rather than the reach effect. In addition, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game by the synergistic effect of the reach effect and the notification effect.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Movable bodies (eg 7) and
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to C) and
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
As a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed during the variable display of the symbol, the first notification effect (for example, the display of the button image 51 related to the premier button effect) and the first notification effect are It is possible to execute the second notification effect (for example, the operation of the effect item 7 related to the hit operation effect), which is a different effect, to operate the movable body once at different execution timings.
It is possible to execute a light emitting effect (for example, rainbow-colored light emission of 25A, 25B, 37A to C) that causes the light-emitting means to emit light with a specific light-emitting color (for example, rainbow color).
A light emitting effect is executed in association with the first notification effect, and a light emission effect is executed in association with the second notification effect.

According to such a configuration, the first notification effect and the second notification effect can be executed once during each symbol variation display, while the light emission effect can be executed a plurality of times. In addition, a light emitting effect is executed along with both the first notification effect and the second notification effect. This makes it possible to have a relationship between the first notification effect and the second notification effect, which are executed only once during one symbol variation display.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Movable bodies (eg 7) and
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to C) and
Input means (for example, 26) that can be input by the player,
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
As a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed during the variable display of the symbol, a first notification effect (for example, a button image 51 related to the premier button effect) for prompting the player to input to the input means is displayed. ) And the second notification effect (for example, the operation of the effect item 7 related to the hit operation effect) for operating the movable body.
It is possible to execute a light emitting effect (for example, rainbow-colored light emission of 25A, 25B, 37A to C) that causes the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emitting color.
The light emission effect can be executed during the first notification effect, and the light emission effect can be executed during the second notification effect.
When the second notification effect is executed after the first notification effect is executed, the light emission effect is started with the start of the first notification effect, and the light emission effect is continuously executed until the second notification effect is in progress. do.

According to such a configuration, a light emitting effect is executed in which the light emitting means emits light to a specific light emitting color with the start of the first notification effect, and this light emitting effect is continued during the first notification effect and the second notification effect. Can be executed. This makes it possible to have continuity and relevance between the first notification effect and the second notification effect using different production means.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is
Movable bodies (eg 7) and
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to C) and
Input means (for example, 26) that can be input by the player,
A determination means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, S21, S22), and
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game and the special game execution means (for example, S6)
A symbol control means (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a variable manner and then displaying the stop.
A production control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means is
As a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed during the variable display of the symbol, a first notification effect (for example, a button image 51 related to the premier button effect) for prompting the player to input to the input means is displayed. ) And the second notification effect (for example, the operation of the effect item 7 related to the hit operation effect) for operating the movable body.
It is possible to execute a light emitting effect (for example, rainbow-colored light emission of 25A, 25B, 37A to C) that causes the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emitting color.
When the second notification effect is executed after the first notification effect is executed, the light emission effect is started with the start of the first notification effect, and the light emission effect is started with the start of the second notification effect. ..

According to such a configuration, the light emission effect can be executed at the timing when both the first notification effect and the second notification effect are started. This makes it possible to have a relationship between the first notification effect and the second notification effect using different production means.

1 Game machine 5 Liquid crystal display device 11 1st start port 25 Board lamp 26 Direction button 262 Button lamp 37 Frame lamp 38 Start port lamp 100 Game control board 101 CPU
102 ROM
103 RAM
130 Production control board 131 CPU
132 ROM
133 RAM
140 Image acoustic control board 150 Lamp control board

Claims (1)

The first light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors and
A second light emitting means capable of emitting light in multiple colors,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means because the game medium has won a prize in the winning means.
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game and the special game execution means.
A symbol control means for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Equipped with a production control means to control the production,
The effect control means is
By causing the first light emitting means to emit light with a predetermined emission color in response to the winning of the game medium to the winning means, the winning means is notified that the game medium has won a prize.
A hold display effect that displays a hold image indicating that the variable display of the symbol is held in a predetermined effect means, and a hold display effect.
During the variable display of the symbol, the variable display effect of displaying the variable display image indicating that the symbol is in the variable display on the predetermined effect means, and the variable display effect.
A specific effect of displaying the variable display image in a specific mode for notifying that the special game is executed, and a specific effect.
During the variable display of the symbol, the expectation degree effect that makes the special game expected to be executed by using the predetermined effect means, and the expectation degree effect.
An effect performed during the execution of the expectation degree effect, the notification effect notifying that the special game is executed by using the predetermined effect means, and the notification effect.
With the start of the specific effect, the first light emitting effect of causing the first light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emitting color different from the predetermined light emitting color, and
With the start of the notification effect, it is possible to execute the second light emission effect of causing the second light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color.
When the game medium wins a prize in the winning means during the execution of the first light emitting effect, the light emitting in a specific light emitting color in the first light emitting means is continued.
When the expectation degree effect is executed while the hold display effect and the variable display effect are being executed, the hold image is hidden while the display of the variable display image is continued.
When the notification effect and the second light emission effect are executed while the specific effect and the first light emission effect are being executed, the variable display image displayed in the specific aspect is hidden. , Continuing to emit light with a specific light emitting color in the first light emitting means,
A gaming machine that ends light emission in a specific light emitting color in the second light emitting means after finishing the notification effect.

Images